IMPORTANT

READ THIS BEFORE USING YOUR NEW MICROLOG

The Microlog must be manually initialized when you first receive it.

¾ To verify that your Microlog has been initialized properly,

here is a technique we suggest you use.

Before initializing, go to the Microlog’s Utilities/System Setup

screen and set Auto Range:On. Initialize as described below,
then go back to the Utilities/System Setup screen. If you see
Auto Range: set to Off, you have successfully initialized.

¾ Warning - Initialization resets all Microlog settings to

their factory defaults, deletes all downloaded ROUTE infor-
mation, and deletes any measurements stored in the
Microlog.

To initialize the Microlog:

With the Microlog OFF, simultaneously hold down the Microlog’s
9 and 6 keys.
While depressing the 9 and 6 keys, press and release the ON/OFF
key, continue holding down the 9 and 6 keys until the Microlog’s
first screen fully displays.
The Microlog’s status line at the top of the main menu display
should indicate 100% of free memory.
(This page intentionally blank)
 Microlog
Data Collector/Analyzer
CMVA60 & CMVA60 ULS

Supports MICROLOG Firmware Version 3.81

Supports PRISM2 Version 1.31
Supports PRISM4 for Windows Version 1.32
User Manual: Part No. 31814500
Revision A

User Manual

Copyright  1986-1999 by SKF Condition Monitoring Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
4141 Ruffin Road San Diego, CA 92123-1841 USA
Telephone: (858) 496-3400, FAX (858) 496-3531
Customer Service: 1-800-523-7514
SKF Condition Monitoring Area Centers
North and South America
4141 Ruffin Road
San Diego, California 92123 USA
Telephone (858) 496-3400
FAX (858) 496-3531
Europe, Africa, Middle East
Postbox 2091
5300 CB Zaltbommel
The Netherlands
Telephone (+ 31-418)-681818
FAX (+ 31-418)-681800
Asia, Pacific
Kawasan Perindustrian Nilai
P.O. Box 26
71807 Nilai
Negeri Sembilan Darul Khusus
Malaysia
Telephone (+ 60-6)-799-2713
FAX (+ 60-6)-799-2407

121099 sbg
SKF Condition Monitoring
Service Policy, Warranty, Disclaimer, and Limita-
tion of Remedies
EXCEPT FOR THE LIM- that the defect is not within
ITE D WARRANT Y DE- the scope of this warranty, an
SCRIBED BELOW, THERE estimate of repair charges and
ARE NO WARRANTIES, a request for authorization to
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, proceed with repair will be
INCL UDING BUT NOT submitted, along with a state-
L IMIT E D TO TH E IM- ment of the reasons the re-
PLIED WARRANTIES OF pairs are not considered to be
MERCHANTABILITY AND covered by the warranty.
FITNESS FOR A PARTICU- This warranty does not extend
L AR P URPOSE ; AL L to system components such as
SUCH WARRANTIES ARE transducers, drivers, and ca-
EXPRESSLY AND SPE- ble assemblies manufactured
CIFICALLY DISCLAIMED. by others. Warranty for these
MICROLOG is guaranteed components will be their
free of defects in material and manufacturer’s standard.
workmanship. Manufacturer’s liability under
E l ect roni c compone nts, this warranty is limited to re-
transducers, accelerometers, pair or replacement of any de-
and the keypad are guaranteed fective instrument at the
for a period of twelve (12) discretion of the manufac-
months, mechanical compo- turer.
nents and cable assemblies In the event that any of the
are guaranteed for a period of above limitations are held un-
ninety (90) days. enforceable, our liability to
This warranty does not extend you shall not exceed the li-
to units that have been mis- cense fee you paid, regardless
used, altered, or repaired of the form of any claim. Be-
wi thout manufact ur er’s cause of the extreme diversity
authorization. Defects or of ways that the product can
failures experienced during be used, you are advised to
the warranty period will be test the product thoroughly
corrected at no charge at the for your purposes before rely-
manufacturer’s facility. If, ing on it.
upon examination, it is found
(This page intentionally blank)
 Table of Contents

Introduction I
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Who Uses the Microlog/PRISM System? . . . . I-3
What is the CMVA60 Microlog System? . . . . I-3
Microlog System Connections . . . . . . . . . . I-8
What You Will Find On The Main Screen . . . I-9
The Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15
The Backlighting Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-19
BNC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-20
How to Initialize Your Microlog . . . . . . . . . I-22

Standard Microlog Measurement Setups App

How to Use this “Applications” Section . . App-2
What Is Typical Machinery? . . . . . . . . . App-3
What Are Standard Measurements? . . . . App-4
Velocity Measurement
Assumptions and Deviations . . . . . . . . App-6
Standard Velocity Measurement . . . . . . . App-9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-10
Setting the Microlog’s Utilities Options . App-10
Standard Velocity Measurement Setup . . App-12
Standard Acceleration Measurement . . . App-15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-16
Standard Acceleration Measurement Setup App-16
Standard Enveloped
Acceleration Measurement . . . . . . . App-19
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-20
Standard Enveloped
Acceleration Measurement Setup . . . . App-20
Standard Displacement Measurement . . App-23
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-24

CMVA60 Microlog TOC - 1

User Manual change 01
 Standard Displacement
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . App-25

The Route Menu 1

The ROUTE Feature of the
PRISM Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Collecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
The Route List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Static Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Measurement Options Menu (Static) . . . . . 1-8
Dynamic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Measurement Options Menu (Dynamic) . . . 1-21
Using a Temporarily Attached Pickup . . . . . 1-21
Hints for Efficient Data Collection . . . . . . . 1-22
To Make An On-the-Spot Analysis . . . . . . . 1-24
Spectral Banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Downloading FAM Information . . . . . . . . 1-28
Multi-Point Automation (MPA) . . . . . . . . 1-32
MPA ROUTE Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
MPA Group Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

The NonRoute Menu 2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Types of Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Dynamic Measurements (Overview) . . . . . . 2-4
Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Spectrum Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq . . . 2-14
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders . . 2-20
Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Display Setup/Trace: Single . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Display Setup/Trace: Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Trigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only) . . . 2-26
Marker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only) . . . 2-29
Collecting NonRoute Dynamic Data . . . . . . 2-32
Using the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

TOC - 2 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 Process Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Collecting NonRoute Process Data . . . . . . 2-43
HFD Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Collecting NonRoute HFD Data . . . . . . . 2-46
Running Speed Measurements . . . . . . . . 2-47
Collecting NonRoute Running Speed Data . . 2-49

The Transfer Menu 3

Setting the Communication Mode Parameters . 3-1
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Data Transfer - Download . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Data Transfer - Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

The Applications Menu 4

Balancing (Basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Basic Balancing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Balancing (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options . . . . 4-20
Reference Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Trial Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Trim Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
The Review/Enter Data Screens . . . . . . . . 4-47
Save Balance Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
The Utility Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Combining Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Splitting One Weight Into Two . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Balance Job Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Clearing the Current Job From
Temporary Memory (RAM) . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Reset Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Delete Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Advanced Balancing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Tracking Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Cyclic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Current Analysis Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Current Analysis Data Collection . . . . . . . 4-86

CMVA60 Microlog TOC - 3

User Manual change 01
 Bump Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Run Up/Coast Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Configuration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

The Analyzer Menu 5

The Analyzer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Collecting Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Using the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Phase Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

The Review Menu 6

The Review Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

The Reports Menu 7

The Reports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
The Report Controls Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
F1 - Route List/F2 - Print . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Sample Report Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

The Utilities Menu 8

Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Temp/Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Set Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Route Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Memory Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Flash Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

TOC - 4 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing A
Changing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Unintentional Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Aborting Deep Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Thermal Switch - NiMH Battery Pack . . . . . A-6

Specifications B
Specifications for CMVA60 . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Why Zoom? C
Why Zoom? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Multi-pin Input Pinouts D

Pinout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D -1

Remote Communications E
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Preference Settings (PRISM 4 Remote) . . . . . E-1
Placing PRISM 4 Remote in "Waiting" Mode . . E-9
Preference Settings (Microlog) . . . . . . . . E-10
Microlog Login
(Remote Communication Module) . . . . . E-12
Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
Load Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
Change DBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20
Clear Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
Reset DBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
Supported Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
Troubleshooting Modem Communications . . E-26

CMVA60 Microlog TOC - 5

User Manual change 01
 Microlog Download Utility F
Installing Microlog Download Utility . . . . . F-1
Connecting your Microlog . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Microlog Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Downloading Code/Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

Triax Sensor Interface G

How to Mount the
Triax Accelerometer Sensor . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Triaxial MPA ROUTE Setup . . . . . . . . . . G-8
Connecting the
Triaxial Sensor to the Microlog . . . . . . . G-10
Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection . . . . G-11

Glossary

Index

TOC - 6 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 2-27-92 3:25 S.G.
02/19/92
Introduction

About This Manual

This manual introduces you to the CMVA60 Microlog sys-
tem. It offers a complete and detailed reference to each
Microlog menu, data screen, and data screen option. This
information is essential when setting up the CMVA60
Microlog and when using the Microlog to collect and dis-
play machinery data.

¾ The CMVA60 ULS is the Ultra Low

Speed version of the standard CMVA60.
Its performance is optimized for ultra low
speed machine applications. All other
functionality for the CMVA60 ULS re-
mains identical to the CMVA60 V3.81.
As you use this manual, you’ll discover certain conven-
tions used:
Bold type is used to indicate text that appears in a
Microlog menu or data screen.
Italics are used to emphasize important information.

¾ are used to indicate notes to the reader.

Step-by-step procedures are sequenced using
bullets, •.

¾ The CMVA60 Microlog may be config-

ured for either English or Metric units of
measurement. In this manual, all
Microlog setup and display screens ap-
pear with English units.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 1

User Manual
Introduction
About This Manual

Chapter Overview
This manual’s chapters are organized to help the new
Microlog user quickly set up the Microlog for measuring
specific applications, and to quickly reference the
Microlog’s menus, data screens, and options. A chapter
overview follows:
Introduction - Describes this User Manual, overviews the
Microlog system, and describes new enhancements to the
Microlog data collector.
Applications - This section uses flow charts and text to
help new users quickly set up the Microlog to perform
“ standard” vibration measurements on “ typical” rotating
machinery.
Reference Manual - Chapters 1 - 8
Chapters 1 through 8 offer a complete and detailed descrip-
tion of each Microlog menu, its data screens and options:
Chapter 1, The Route Menu
Chapter 2, The NonRoute Menu
Chapter 3, The Transfer Menu
Chapter 4, The Applications Menu
Chapter 5, The Analyzer Menu
Chapter 6, The Review Menu
Chapter 7, The Reports Menu
Chapter 8, The Utilities Menu
Appendices A - F
Appendices A through F provide valuable information on
the Microlog and its applications:
Appendix A, Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing
Appendix B, Specifications
Appendix C, Why Zoom?
Appendix D, Multi-pin Input Pinouts
Appendix E, Remote Communications

Intro - 2 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
Who Uses the Microlog/PRISM System?

Appendix F - Microlog Download Utility

Appendix G - Introduction to the Triax Acceler-
ometer Sensor

Who Uses the Microlog/PRISM System?

The CMVA60 Microlog/PRISM System is used by experi-
enced machinery maintenance personnel who wish to col-
lect and analyze vibration data from their rotating
machinery, to help reduce costs and downtime.

What is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

A CMVA60 Microlog System (Figure I - 1) consists of
three components:
• A CMVA60 Microlog data collector,
• A host computer with PRISM2, PRISM4 for
Windows, or equivalent software, and
• A support module.
da

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 3

User Manual
Introduction
What is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

CMSS50080 or support
CMSS50080-CE and module
CMSS250 25 PIN to 9 PIN

CMSS50077

host
computer Microlog
data collector

Figure I - 1. The Microlog System.

The CMVA60 Microlog Data Collector

The CMVA60 Microlog data collector is a lightweight,
portable, data acquisition and storage terminal (Figure
I - 2). It collects machinery vibration, temperature, and
other condition monitoring measurements. Together with
visual observations, the CMVA60 Microlog allows for de-
tailed machine condition analyses in a harsh industrial en-
vironment.

Intro - 4 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
What is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

CMVA55-1.w mf

Figure I - 2. Model CMVA60.

The Microlog performs all the tasks required for machin-

ery predictive (condition) maintenance. It automatically
collects both dynamic (vibration) and static (process) meas-
urements from almost any source, it provides easy to use
set up screens for quickly capturing data related to specific
applications like balancing, tracking filter, cyclic analysis,
and current analysis, and it allows the user to configure up
to 12 measurements for automatic data collection at one
measurement point. Using the same sensor, the user need
press only one button to sequentially collect all pre-config-
ured measurements.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 5

User Manual
Introduction
What is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

A variety of input devices may be used with your

Microlog. Vibration measurements are collected with a
handheld probe, magnetically mounted probe, permanently
mounted sensors, or from an installed monitoring system.
Temperature measurements are collected with a non-con-
tact infrared sensor or with a contact probe.
Values read from other indicators may be entered into the
Microlog by pressing the appropriate numeric keys on the
Microlog keyboard. You can also enter your observations
by typing them in languages or as coded notes.
In addition to its function as a data collector, the Microlog
has all the functions and performances of a powerful ana-
lyzer to capture and display high resolution spectra for de-
tailed analysis. A Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
frequency spectrum and a time domain waveform are avail-
able for display on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
screen.
The Microlog automatically turns itself off after 5 minutes
of inactivity to preserve battery life (in all functions except
Analyzer, Transfer, Battery/Temperature, and Re-
ports).

PRISM Host Software

PRISM2 (DOS version) and PRISM4 for Windows are op-
tional support software packages that work with the
Microlog to help machinery maintenance personnel man-
age machine condition data.

¾ In this manual, the term “ PRISM host

software” describes both PRISM versions
(DOS and Windows).
PRISM host software automatically performs the tedious
clerical work required in sorting and saving data.

Intro - 6 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
What is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

Through detailed printed reports it alerts maintenance per-

sonnel to alarm conditions (exceptions from normal).
PRISM host software helps machinery maintenance person-
nel to understand the true condition of their rotating ma-
chinery and to base maintenance decisions on the actual
condition of machines.
PRISM host software excels in presenting collected ma-
chinery data in statistical and graphic plot format to obtain
useful analysis data (Figure I - 3).
30.pcx

Figure I - 3. A PRISM4 Spectrum Display.

Refer to the PRISM host software’s User Manual for op-

erational details.

¾ The host computer has varying minimum

configurations depending on which
PRISM host software is used. See your
PRISM host software’s User Manual for
detailed minimum configuration informa-
tion.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 7

User Manual
Introduction
What is the CMVA60 Microlog System?

The Support Module

The CMVA6112 Support Module (Figure I - 4) is capable
of fast charging the NiMH (CMVA50230-1) battery pack.
suppmod2.pcx

Figure I - 4.
The CMVA6112 Support Module.

There are 2 LEDs and a Deep Discharge button on the

CMVA6112 Support Module. The Deep Discharge button
is used for deep discharging the battery pack in the sup-
port module’s pocket. Once deep discharging is complete,
the support module automatically fast charges the battery
pack.
The “ Battery in Charger” LED indicates the charging
status of the battery pack on the support module, the “Bat-
tery in Microlog” LED displays the charging status of the
battery pack in the Microlog.
The LEDs indicate the battery pack’s 3 different charging
modes:
Deep Discharging (Support Module battery only) -
LED flashes slowly.
Fast Charge - LED is ON continuously.

Intro - 8 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
Microlog System Connections

Trickle Charge - LED flashes quickly.

¾ Reference Appendix A for a detailed de-

scription of battery capacity, care, and
testing.

¾ The CMVA6112 is powered by an univer-

sal AC/DC adapter. Use of a different
adapter to power the Support Module
should be consulted with the manufac-
turer, or the Support Module may be dam-
aged.

Microlog System Connections

The support module (Figure I - 4) supplied with each Mi-
crolog system provides a convenient, compatible interface
between the Microlog and its host computer through RS-
232 connectors. The support module also contains the bat-
tery charger for the Microlog’s batteries.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 9

User Manual
Introduction
What You Will Find On The Main Screen

> To connect your Microlog system:

• Using the supplied CMSS50080, CMSS50080-
CE cable, or CMSS250 (25 PIN to 9 PIN adapt-
er supporting 9 PIN serial ports), connect your
host computer to the support module between
the connection marked COMPUTER on the
support module and one of the serial ports
(COM1 or COM2) on the back of your com-
puter (Figure I - 1).
• Using the supplied CMSS50077 cable, connect
the support module to the Microlog between the
connector marked MICROLOG on the support
module and the 25-pin D connector on the top
surface of the Microlog Collector.
• Plug the support module into an AC power sup-
ply through the external transformer adapter sup-
plied with the support module.

¾ Before using your Microlog, check to

make sure that the transformer adapter
supplied with your support module is cor-
rect for your electric line supply.
The Microlog uses the same 25-pin D
connector for connection to its various
sensors and to its support module.
Keep the connector attached to insure it
remains clean while in an industrial envi-
ronment.

What You Will Find On The Main Screen

The Microlog collector has a large, supertwist graphic liq-
uid crystal display (LCD). Everything needed to identify
and assess a measurement (identification, description, en-
gineering units, warning alarms, last value recorded, and
current value) appears on the graphic LCD screen.

Intro - 10 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
What You Will Find On The Main Screen

When you first turn on the Microlog collector, the main

menu and title block are displayed (Figure I - 5).
03-2mlog.pcx

Figure I - 5.
The CMVA60 Microlog Power Up Screen.

Version Number
The title block, displayed to the right of the main menu on
power up, includes the firmware version number. Use this
number if you call customer support.

¾ If you call customer support, you will

also be asked for the Microlog’s serial
number. It is located on back of the Mi-
crolog case..
The Microlog screen contains three main areas: status
line, working area, and prompt area.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 11

User Manual
Introduction
What You Will Find On The Main Screen

The Status Line

The one-line strip at the top of your Microlog screen is
called the status line (Figure I - 6).
screen00.pcx

status line

Figure I - 6. The Status Line.

The status line displays the current date and time (if you
previously set them correctly). The status line also con-
stantly reports on the percent of free memory available.
Other items of information appear from time to time in the
status line. They are:
• Signal Overload Warning (OV)
• Low Battery Warning (BT)
• Out of Limit Collector Temperature Warning
(TP)
• Shift Lock On up arrow indicator
When the BT (low battery charge) indicator appears, you
have approximately 20 minutes to complete immediate
measurements before the Microlog shuts down to preserve
your data. At this point you can replace the main battery
or connect the Microlog to its support module charger.
All data and instructions in the Microlog are fully pre-
served for up to 3 minutes by an internal power source
while you change the main battery.
The Signal Overload Warning (OV) displays to warn of
probable inaccuracies when an incoming signal overloads
the internal signal conditioning. Do not record data with
the OV indicator continuously on. Instead, range up by
pressing the up arrow key until the OV warning disappears.

Intro - 12 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
What You Will Find On The Main Screen

The Working Area

The Microlog’s working area includes all screen lines ex-
cept the top line (the status line), and the bottom line (the
prompt line).
screen00.pcx

Figure I - 7. The Main Menu.

The working area displays various menus (Figures 1 - 7

and 1 - 8), vibration spectra (Figure 1 - 9), and machinery
condition displays (Figure 1 - 10).

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 13

User Manual
Introduction
What You Will Find On The Main Screen

screen02.pcx

Figure I - 8. The Speed Input Selection Screen.

screen07.pcx

Figure I - 9. A Vibration Spectrum Display Screen.

Intro - 14 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
What You Will Find On The Main Screen

battery.pcx

Figure I - 10.
The Battery and Operating Temperature Condition Screen.

The Prompt Area

The one-line strip at the bottom of your Microlog screen is
called the prompt line. Its prompts (messages) are single
line clues to what is happening and to what choices you
have next (Figure 1 - 11).
screen01.pcx

prompt area

Figure I - 11. The Prompt Line.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 15

User Manual
Introduction
The Keypad

The Keypad
For easy learning and use, the Microlog keys are divided
into five groups: Operating Keys, Control Keys, Numeric
Keys, Function Keys, and Miscellaneous Keys (Figure I -
12).
CMVA55-1.w mf

6 Control
4 Operating Keys
Keys

12 Numeric
Keys

13 Function Keys

3 Miscellaneous Keys Figure I - 12.

A Microlog Front Panel.

Intro - 16 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
The Keypad

Operating Keys
The four Operating Keys are ENTER (2), DISPLAY IL-
LUMINATION and ON/OFF (Figure I - 13).
CMVA55-1.w mf

Figure I - 13.
The Operating Keys: ENTER (2),
Display Illumination and ON/OFF.

Control Keys
CMVA55-1.w mf

Figure I - 14. The Control Keys.

The six control keys are located below both ENTER keys
(Figure I - 14).

Escape and Menu - The two leftmost keys are designated

ESCAPE and MENU.
MENU displays a pop-up menu window.
ESCAPE returns the Microlog back one menu. The
Microlog reports the action to be performed by the

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 17

User Manual
Introduction
The Keypad

ENTER, MENU, and ESCAPE keys in the prompt

line at the bottom of your screen.

Arrow Keys - The four keys to the left of the ENTER key
are the arrow keys. The right arrow and left arrow
keys control the menu pointer bar, control the FFT
spectrum cursor, are used in display expansion, and
are used to open or close SETs from a ROUTE list.
The up arrow and down arrow keys also control the
menu pointer bar. In addition, they control full scale
amplitude range, reposition markers, and are used to
traverse the ROUTE list via SETs.

Numeric Keys
The numeric keys (Figure I - 15) are located in the right
bottom section of the keypad.
CMVA55-1.w mf

Figure I - 15. The Numeric Keys.

Numeric keys may, under certain circumstances, assume

additional functions which duplicate commands on the pop-
up menu. PGUP, PGDN, HOME, END, (GLOBAL)
OPEN, and (GLOBAL) CLOSE may all be implemented

Intro - 18 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
The Keypad

directly from the numeric keypad without displaying the

pop-up menu. This feature is very useful and saves consid-
erable time when moving through a hierarchy list.

Function Keys
You may activate analyzer functions such as FREEZE,
MKRS ON/OFF, DISPLY EXPAND, SAVE, and
ZOOM by pressing labeled keys located in the left center
section of the keypad (Figure I - 16).
CMVA55-1.w mf

Figure I - 16. The Function Keys.

Miscellaneous Keys
SHIFT - You make most entries through the keypad in un-
shifted mode. This includes operating the arrow
keys, entering numerals, and activating analyzer func-
tions. However, you must use shifted mode to enter
letters (alphabetic characters). You change between
shifted and unshifted modes by pressing the medium

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 19

User Manual
Introduction
The Backlighting Key

grey SHIFT key located at the bottom center of the

keypad (Figure I - 17).
CMVA55-1.w mf

Figure I - 17. The Miscellaneous Keys.

SHIFT is a toggle action key. It works like the

CAPS LOCK key on your computer keyboard.
When the keypad is in shifted mode, an upward point-
ing arrow in the status line just to the right of percent-
age memory remaining serves as a reminder (Figure I
- 18).
caps lock indicator
screen01.pcx

Figure I - 18. The Caps Lock Indicator.

SPACE - Enters a space character (like the space bar on

your computer).

DEL - Deletes the current character at the cursor position

(only valid when editing a field.)

The Backlighting Key

Press the “ light bulb,” or Display Illumination key to the
left of the ON/OFF key (Figure I - 19) to toggle screen
backlighting on and off. Use this feature to make viewing
easier in a dimly lighted area.

Intro - 20 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
BNC Connectors

CMVA55-1.w mf

Figure I - 19

¾ Backlighting requires considerable power

and could reduce the time between battery
charges by as much as one-half (typically
one-fourth).

BNC Connectors
Three BNC connectors (INPUT, PHASE, and OUTPUT)
are provided on the CMVA60 Microlog. These connectors
provide cabling flexibility to external sensors or external
monitoring/recording equipment.
When using the two input BNC connectors (INPUT and
PHASE) it is important to note that the multi-pin connec-
tor’s “ Cable Identification” has been disabled to achieve
the flexibility of accepting signals from different sensors;
including accelerometers, velocity and displacement sen-
sors, process inputs, etc. Therefore, when the INPUT
BNC connector is activated, the CMVA60 Microlog pro-
ceeds to take data when the measurement is started, even
though there is no sensor or cable attached.

¾ Power is supplied to BNC connectors

only when Connector:BNC and Sensor
Power:ICP are selected in the Utilities/
System Setup option.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 21

User Manual
Introduction
BNC Connectors

These BNCs connectors are labeled:

INPUT - Accepts dynamic and process inputs using off

the shelf interfaces such as ultrasonic detectors. It
can be selected in the Utilities/System Setup menu
as either ICP, External, or Charge Amp.
ICP - Selected when a sensor which requires 24 V
dc/2.2 mA is attached to the INPUT.

¾ INPUT BNC must be set to the ICP op-

tion to power any sensor connected to the
INPUT BNC (which requires 24 V
dc/2.2 mA).
External - Select when taking measurements out of
“ Buffered” outputs like those on permanently
mounted rack systems, process signals, or from a sin-
gal generator.
Charge Amp - Select when a “ Charge Mode” Accel-
erometer (pC/g) is attached.

PHASE - Accepts and conditions tachometer inputs such

as; Eddy Probes, laser tachometers, optical tachome-
ters, etc.

OUTPUT - Provides a buffered replica of the input signal

for recording, headphones, or further external signal
processing. It is important to note that depending on
the size of the signal and the gain selected, the output
may be 1/10 the amplitude of the input.

Intro - 22 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Introduction
How to Initialize Your Microlog

How to Initialize Your Microlog

The Microlog must be manually initialized when you first
receive it.

> To verify that your CMVA60 Microlog has been initial-

ized properly:
• Access the Microlog’s Utilities/System Setup
screen and set Auto Range:On.
• Initialize as described below.
• Go back to the Utilities/System Setup screen.
If you see Auto Range: set to OFF, you have
successfully initialized.

¾ Warning - Initialization resets all

Microlog settings to their factory defaults,
deletes all downloaded ROUTE informa-
tion, and deletes any measurements stored
in the Microlog.

> To initialize your Microlog:

• With the Microlog OFF, simultaneously hold
down the Microlog’s 9 and 6 keys.
• While depressing the 9 and 6 keys, press and re-
lease the ON/OFF key, continue holding down
the 9 and 6 keys until the Microlog’s first screen
fully displays. 8
• The Microlog’s status line at the top of the
Main menu display should indicate 100% of
free memory.

CMVA60 Microlog Intro - 23

User Manual
Introduction
How to Initialize Your Microlog

(This page intentionally blank)

Intro - 24 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Applications

Standard Microlog
Measurement
Setups

CMVA60 Microlog App - 1

User Manual
Standard Microlog Measurement Setups
How to Use this “ Applications” Section

How to Use this “Applications” Section

This “ Applications” section is designed to help Microlog
users quickly set up the Microlog data collector. In it we
use flow charts and text to describe “ standard” Microlog
measurement settings for performing vibration measure-
ments on typical rotating machinery.

¾ These standard settings are provided for

“ getting started” purposes. The best set-
tings for measuring your specific machin-
ery may vary. Over time, as your
Microlog experience increases, you
should modify these standard settings to
obtain the best Microlog measurement set-
ups for your machinery.

App - 2 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Microlog Measurement Setups
What Is Typical Machinery?

What Is Typical Machinery?

This Applications section describes standard Microlog
measurement setups for measuring typical machinery.
We realize there is really no such thing as “ typical” ma-
chinery. Machine construction, installation, and operation
differ greatly from one plant to the next, and who’s to say
what is considered “ typical” . However, there is a general
class of machinery consisting of machines that are com-
monly measured with the same Microlog measurement set-
ups. We have classified this machinery group as “ typical”
machinery.
Typical Machinery - Typical machinery is consid-
ered to be rotating equipment; such as fans, pumps,
compressors, motors, or generators operating at
speeds between 600 RPM and 10,000 RPM. All typi-
cal machinery has the following components:
shafts
couplings
bearings
The Microlog’s measurement setups are nearly identi-
cal when measuring components on typical machin-
ery (whether the machine is a pump, fan, etc.)
Therefore, instead of repeatedly describing identical
Microlog setups for various machines, we group ma-
chines commonly measured with the same Microlog
setups, and describe the standard Microlog setups for
measuring this group of machinery.

¾ Certain applications do not fall into the

“ typical” machinery group as they re-
quire variations in the Microlog’s stand-
ard measurement setups. Specifically
very low speed and very high speed com-
ponents (found in paper machines and

CMVA60 Microlog App - 3

User Manual
Standard Microlog Measurement Setups
What Are Standard Measurements?

high speed turbomachinery) and recipro-

cating machinery require different
Microlog measurement setups than typi-
cal machinery.
These generalizations may contradict what you consider to
be typical and non-typical machinery classifications. Keep
in mind, they are used for organizational purposes only.

What Are Standard Measurements?

Because vibration is considered by many as one of the best
indicators of machinery condition, vibration measurements
are classified as “ standard” measurements. Of the four
common vibration measurements (acceleration, velocity,
displacement, and enveloped acceleration), velocity meas-
urements are typically used to detect low frequency rota-
tional events (for example, imbalance, misalignment,
looseness, shaft bow, etc.) on the majority of rotating ma-
chinery.

¾ Historically, velocity measurements have

been most popular when measuring vibra-
tion, however, because of improvements
in accelerometer technology, acceleration
measurements are becoming more preva-
lent.

Velocity - Since velocity is commonly the most frequent

low frequency vibration measurement, the Microlog’s
standard velocity measurement’s setup is the core of
this Applications section.
A Standard Velocity Measurement flow chart de-
scribes Microlog menu selections that set up a stand-
ard velocity measurement. This allows the new user
to reference the flow chart to quickly and consistently

App - 4 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Microlog Measurement Setups
What Are Standard Measurements?

set up the Microlog for standard velocity measure-

ments.

Acceleration measurements are typically used to deter-

mine higher frequency rotational problems (for exam-
ple, high speed machinery operating above 10,000
RPM, and rolling element bearing and gearbox prob-
lems).

Enveloped Acceleration (ENV Acc) measurements am-

plify low frequency events in high frequency, repeti-
tive vibration signals and successfully detect and
measure rolling element bearing and gearbox prob-
lems in early failure stages.

Displacement measurements are commonly used to meas-

ure the relative distance between two surfaces. On
light rotors operating in heavy, stiff casings, most of
the vibration force is dissipated between the shaft and
the bearing surface, never reaching the housing’s sur-
face. In this case, eddy probes and displacement
measurements are a must.
Standard acceleration, ENV Acc, and displacement meas-
urement Microlog setups closely resemble the standard ve-
locity measurement’s setup with only a few exceptions. In
this Applications section, following the velocity measure-
ment flow chart, Standard Acceleration, Enveloped Ac-
celeration, and Displacement Measurement setup
sections describe deviations from a velocity measurement’s
setup (flow chart) that change a velocity measurement into
an acceleration, ENV Acc, or displacement measurement.
We find this to be more efficient than repeating the entire
flow chart, noting only a few exceptions.

CMVA60 Microlog App - 5

User Manual
Standard Microlog Measurement Setups
Velocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

Typical Machinery
Pumps Fans
Generators Motors
(operating between 10Hz and 3kHz)

Standard Measurements
Velocity
Acceleration
ENV Acc
Displacement

Velocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

Assumptions
It should be understood that the Standard Velocity Meas-
urement flow chart settings are selected with the following
assumptions:
• “ Typical” machinery is being measured for de-
tection/condition monitoring purposes, not for
analysis purposes.
• “ Typical” machinery is being measured for low
order rotational problems (for example, imbal-
ance, misalignment, looseness, soft foot, bent
shaft, etc.)
• An industry standard 100 mV/g accelerometer
is being used. For example: SKF’s CMSS787A
Accelerometer.
• Machine speed is greater than 600 RPM.
• Data collection speed is not a major concern.

App - 6 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Microlog Measurement Setups
Velocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

¾ It should be noted that longer measure-

ment times often provide more valuable
data.

Deviations
When setting up a Microlog measurement, certain option
settings are determined by the component’s speed and the
type of sensor used, these are:

Type - The measurement Type: option (for example, Ac-

celeration, Acc to Vel, Acc to Disp, Velocity, etc.) is
determined by the measurement’s sensor type and the
desired measurement.

Maximum Freq - The measurement’s maximum fre-

quency (F max) setting is determined by the measured
component’s speed and the type of defect anticipated.
A rule of thumb sets the velocity measurement’s
Maximum Freq. to 5 or 6 times the measured com-
ponent’s running speed. This allows you to analyze
the measurement’s resulting FFT spectrum up to the
5th or 6th harmonic.
For example, when performing a “ standard” velocity
measurement on a non-geared coupling, set Maxi-
mum Freq. to the coupling’s running speed multi-
plied by a factor of 6.

¾ High speed machinery, gearboxes, and

rolling element bearings are best meas-
ured with acceleration or ENV Acc meas-
urements. Reference the Standard
Acceleration and ENV Acc Measure-
ment sections for help with determining
Maximum Frequency settings for these
components.

CMVA60 Microlog App - 7

User Manual
Standard Microlog Measurement Setups
Velocity Measurement Assumptions and Deviations

(This page intentionally blank)

App - 8 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Velocity
Measurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 9

User Manual
Standard Velocity Measurement
Overview

Overview
Since velocity best measures rotational speed events, this
section uses a flow chart to detail the Microlog’s setup for
a standard velocity measurement. This allows the new
user to reference the flow chart to quickly and consistently
set up the Microlog for standard velocity measurements.

¾ Many users supplement velocity measure-

ments with acceleration measurements.
This allows a wide-band view of defect
frequencies in addition to the velocity
measurements’ view of rotational speed
events.

¾ IMPORTANT - Before setting up the

Microlog for a standard velocity measure-
ment, you may wish to clear the Mi-
crolog, then set Microlog Utilities
options. Procedural descriptions follow.

Setting the Microlog’s Utilities Options

¾ The Microlog’s Utilities menu settings

should be set before setting other
Microlog menu options.
Use the following flow chart to set “ standard” Utilities
menu options.

¾ Flow chart selections are indicated with

black highlighting.

App - 10 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Velocity Measurement
Setting the Microlog’s Utilities Options

vl-rputs.pcx

Standard
Microlog
Utilities Menu
Settings
(User preference)

(User preference)

(User preference)

(User preference)

CMVA60 Microlog App - 11

User Manual
Standard Velocity Measurement
Standard Velocity Measurement Setup

Standard Velocity Measurement Setup

CMVA60 Microlog Setup

Use the following flow chart to set up a standard velocity
measurement.

¾ These standard settings are provided for

“ getting started” purposes. The best set-
tings for performing a velocity measure-
ment on your specific machinery may
vary. Over time, as your Microlog experi-
ence increases, you should modify these
typical settings to obtain the best settings
for your machinery.

¾ Flow chart selections are indicated with

black highlighting.

App - 12 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Velocity Measurement
Standard Velocity Measurement Setup

vel-nr-s.pcx

Standard Velocity
Measurement

CMVA60
Microlog

CMVA60 Microlog App - 13

User Manual
Standard Velocity Measurement
Standard Velocity Measurement Setup

(This page intentionally blank)

App - 14 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard
Acceleration
Measurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 15

User Manual
Standard Acceleration Measurement
Overview

Overview
Acceleration measurements are typically used to deter-
mine higher frequency rotational problems (for example,
high speed machinery operating above 10,000 RPM, and
rolling element bearing and gearmesh problems).

¾ Many users supplement acceleration meas-

urements with velocity measurements.
This allows a wide-band view of defect
frequencies in addition to the velocity
measurements’ view of rotational speed
events.
The following information helps Microlog users set up
their CMVA60 Microlog to perform acceleration measure-
ments on typical machinery.

Standard Acceleration Measurement Setup

To set up the Microlog for a standard acceleration measure-
ment, use the Standard Velocity Measurement flow
chart’s settings, with these exceptions:
Type: Acceleration
Lines: 800
Low Freq Cutoff: 2 Hz
Start Freq: 0
Maximum Freq:

• For Couplings/Shafts - For measurements on

non-geared couplings and shafts, use the stand-
ard velocity measurement’s rule of thumb for set-
ting Maximum Frequency: (5 or 6 times the
running speed).

App - 16 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Acceleration Measurement
Standard Acceleration Measurement Setup

• For Bearings - When performing acceleration

measurements on bearings, the Maximum
Frequency is determined by the component’s
shaft speed. Use the following table to set Maxi-
mum Freq:
Shaft Speed Maximum Freq:

< = 1200 RPM 1 kHz

1200-2400 RPM 2 kHz
2400-3600 RPM 5 kHz
> 3600 RPM 10 kHz

These settings produce FFT spectra that allow

analysis of bearing fault frequencies.

• For Gears - When performing acceleration

measurements on gearboxes, the Maximum Fre-
quency setting is typically set to 4X the calcu-
lated gear frequency (determined by the number
of teeth multiplied by the shaft’s RPM) plus
10%.
gear frequency

4 (# of teeth x shaft speed) + 10%

In the resulting FFT spectrum, this allows you

to see up to the 3rd order harmonics, and side-
bands of the 3rd order harmonics.

¾ If sidebands are of interest, use 1600 lines

of FFT resolution.

CMVA60 Microlog App - 17

User Manual
Standard Acceleration Measurement
Standard Acceleration Measurement Setup

(This page intentionally blank)

App - 18 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard
Enveloped
Acceleration
Measurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 19

User Manual
Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement
Overview

Overview
Enveloped Acceleration (ENV Acc) measurements suc-
cessfully detect and measure rolling element bearing and
gearbox problems in early failure stages.
The following information helps Microlog users set up
their Microlog to perform standard ENV Acc vibration
measurements on typical machinery.

Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement Setup

To set up the CMVA60 Microlog for a standard enveloped
acceleration measurement, use the Velocity Measurement
flow chart settings, with these exceptions:
Lines: 800
Type: ENV Acc
Number of Averages: 1
Detection: Pk to Pk
Low Freq Cutoff: 0 or .5% of maximum frequency
Selecting the Type field’s ENV Acc option causes an addi-
tional field (Env Filter) to display on the Microlog screen.

App - 20 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement
Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement Setup

envfil.pcx

Figure 1.
The ENV Filter Pop-Up Menu.

> To set the Env Filter field:

• Move pointer bar to the Env Filter field.
• Press MENU to view the choices (Figure 1).
Env Filter: Select 1 of the 4 Env Filter frequency
bands as described below.

¾ When selecting an envelope filter fre-

quency band, it is very important to know
the bearing frequency that you are looking
for.

CMVA60 Microlog App - 21

User Manual
Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement
Standard Enveloped Acceleration Measurement Setup

Use the following table to determine which band to

select.
Enveloping Settings Microlog

Frequency Speed Analyzing

Filters Band Range Range
1 5 - 100 Hz 0 - 50 RPM 0 - 10 Hz
2 50 - 1,000 Hz 25 - 500 RPM 0 - 100 Hz
3 500 - 10,000 Hz 250 - 5,000 RPM 0 - 1,000 Hz
4 5,000 - 40,000 Hz 2,500 - ...RPM 0 - 10,000 Hz

App - 22 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard
Displacement
Measurement

CMVA60 Microlog App - 23

User Manual
Standard Displacement Measurement
Overview

Overview
Displacement measurements are commonly used to meas-
ure the relative distance between two surfaces. On light ro-
tors operating in heavy, stiff casings, most of the vibration
force is dissipated between the shaft and the bearing sur-
face, never reaching the housing’s surface. Journal bear-
ings (also known as sleeve bearings) are often used in
these situations. These bearings are “ fluid film” type bear-
ings (they have no rolling elements). In this case, eddy
probes and displacement measurements are a must.

¾ Because of their accurate low frequency

response, eddy probes provide the most
accurate displacement measurements. Ve-
locity sensors provide strong response in
the mid frequency range. Integration of a
velocity sensor’s measurement to displace-
ment often provides acceptable results.
Because of their indirect relation to dis-
placement and their poor low frequency
sensitivity, double integration of an accel-
eration measurement to displacement gen-
erally provides poor results.
The following information helps Microlog users set up
their Microlog to perform standard displacement measure-
ments on typical machinery.

App - 24 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Standard Displacement Measurement
Standard Displacement Measurement Setup

Standard Displacement Measurement Setup

To set up the Microlog for a standard displacement meas-
urement, use the Velocity Measurement flow chart set-
tings, with these exceptions:
Type: Displacement (using eddy probes)
Detection: Pk to Pk

CMVA60 Microlog App - 25

User Manual
Standard Displacement Measurement
Standard Displacement Measurement Setup

(This page intentionally blank)

App - 26 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 3-9-92 6:30

1
The Route Menu
¾ In this Chapter, the word “ SET” refers to
SET hierarchy items in PRISM2 (DOS) da-
tabases, and both SET and machine hierar-
chy items in PRISM4 for Windows
databases.

The ROUTE Feature of the PRISM Host Software

The PRISM host software’s Route feature allows you to
build measurement collection sequences (ROUTEs) to help
you perform the most efficient data collection.
When you originally constructed your PRISM host data-
base by the hierarchy method, you more than likely organ-
ized the hierarchy by area, by machine type, or by some
similar grouping. If you downloaded POINTs to the
Microlog collector in hierarchy order, a person collecting
data would probably have to “ skip around” in the ROUTE,
or would have to retrace steps to get to the next data collec-
tion POINT in the ROUTE. Even if you design your data-
base using a “ most efficient ROUTE” method, at the time
of data collection you may want to make changes to a
ROUTE list or to have a POINT appear in more than one
ROUTE.

What is a ROUTE?
A ROUTE is a list of POINTs arranged in sequence for the
most efficient data collection.
The advantage of ROUTE data collection is that measure-
ments can be sequenced for the most efficient data collec-
tion regardless of their location in the hierarchy. This
method also allows a measurement POINT or POINTs to

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 1
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Collecting Data

appear in many different ROUTEs, and provides for a

ROUTE Statistics Report.

¾ Refer to your PRISM host software’s User

Manual for help with building and trans-
ferring PRISM ROUTEs to the Microlog.

Collecting Data
When the Microlog collector is first powered up, the re-
verse video pointer bar in the main menu appears on the
Route choice.

> To start a ROUTE:

• Press 1 or use the up and down arrow keys to
move the pointer bar to 1:Route and press <EN-
TER>. A ROUTE list displays (Figure 1 - 1).
601.pcx

Figure 1 - 1. The ROUTE List Display.

1 - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Collecting Data

If ROUTE instructions were entered when the

ROUTE was created, a line on the screen (such as In-
structions #1) displays in the list. Move the pointer
bar to the Instructions #1 line and press the <EN-
TER> key to view the instructions.

¾ The Microlog’s ROUTE Instruction

screen is limited to a display of 11 lines of
29 characters each, even though you are al-
lowed to enter more in PRISM4. Addi-
tional Instruction pages are automatically
created to accommodate displaying all
downloaded instructions. When viewing
Instructions page 1, press <ENTER> to
view page 2, etc.
If all SETs are closed, it is necessary to open the desired
SET.

> To open a SET and collect data:

• Using the up and down arrow keys, move the
pointer bar to the desired SET.
• Using the right arrow key, open the SET.
• Using the up and down arrow keys, move the
pointer bar to the desired SET or POINT.
• Press the <ENTER> key to start a measurement.

• Perform static and dynamic measurements.

• Repeat the process for each POINT until the se-
quence is complete (an END OF ROUTE mes-
sage appears).
• Press <ENTER>to start the next ROUTE (if one
is loaded in the Microlog collector), or press
<ESCAPE> to return to the ROUTE list.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 3
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
The Route List

¾ Returning to the ROUTE list allows you

to collect measurements elsewhere in the
sequence, or to go back to the host com-
puter and upload the data you have col-
lected.

The Route List

In the Microlog’s ROUTE list, measurements transferred
from the PRISM host software for collection in ROUTE
mode may be stored by hierarchy or by ROUTE name.
An empty NONROUTE SET always appears at the top of
both ROUTE and hierarchy lists (see Figure 1 - 1). All
NONROUTE and ANALYZER measurements are stored
in the NONROUTE SET.
In both hierarchy and ROUTE lists, move the pointer bar
with the up and down arrow keys to select a SET, a
ROUTE, or a specific measurement POINT for measure-
ment. When measurements are collected in sequence, the
pointer bar moves automatically to the next measurement
in the list.
The open/close indicators (equals or hyphen symbols) ap-
pear to the left of all subSETs in a hierarchy list. The equal
symbol (=) indicates that a SET is open, displaying subordi-
nate SETs and/or POINTs. The minus symbol (-) indicates
that the SET is closed, concealing all subordinate POINTS.
The leftmost column on the ROUTE list shown in Figure 1
- 1 contains the letter N (no data), indicating nothing has
yet been recorded, the letter D (data), indicating a measure-
ment has been recorded, or the letter M (messages), indicat-
ing an instruction text screen.
Although a ROUTE list is somewhat simpler than a hierar-
chy list, the Microlog is able to skip entire machines (ex-

1 - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
The Route List

plained later in this chapter) if the POINTs being measured

are in hierarchy form (grouped by machine SETs).

Right and Left Arrow Keys

On a SET - When the pointer bar is on a SET, use the right
and left arrow keys to open and close the SET.

On a POINT - When the pointer bar is on a POINT, use

the right and left arrow keys to move the pointer bar
to the next SET name or to the previous SET name.

Options
With a ROUTE list displayed, press the MENU key. The
pop-up menu displays. Press a numeral on the Microlog’s
keypad or move the pointer bar to your selection and press
the <ENTER> key.
screen13.pcx

Figure 1 - 2.
The Options Menu in the CMVA60 Microlog.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 5
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
The Route List

Options on the screen of Figure 1 - 2 are:

1:Reenter - Returns the Microlog to the last ROUTE

POINT displayed. Reenter is useful when resuming
data collection after the Microlog has been turned off.

2:Page Up - Places the pointer bar on the ROUTE list at

the same line on the previous page.

3:Page Down - Places the pointer bar on the ROUTE list at

the same line on the next page.

4:Go to Top - Places the first SET, POINT, or ROUTE

name that is resident in the Microlog’s memory in the
top line of the ROUTE list.

5:Go to Bottom - Places the pointer bar on the last SET or

last POINT in the last open SET that is resident in the
Microlog’s memory. Note — this may take a couple
of seconds if the downloaded ROUTE is very large.

6:Global Open - In a hierarchy list, this function opens all

SETs that are subordinate to the SET indicated by the
pointer bar. In a ROUTE list, this function displays
all measurement POINTs.

7:Global Close - In a hierarchy list, this function closes all

SETs that are subordinate to the SET indicated by the
pointer bar. In a ROUTE list, this function closes all
SETs and conceals all measurement POINTs.

¾ SETs and measurement POINTs are auto-

matically opened when starting ROUTE
collection.

1 - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Static Measurements

Static Measurements
The Microlog screen display for static (DC) measurements
contains a drawing of a meter (Figure 1 - 3).
scrn11.pcx

alarm
setpoint

Figure 1 - 3. A Static Measurement Screen.

Static measurements (DC volts) collected from a pickup

(such as temperature) and measurements entered numeri-
cally through the keypad display on this screen. Alarm set-
points are marked with arrows on the top edge of the meter
and the meter needle moves in response to the value of the
measured signal.

> To record a static measurement from a directly con-

nected pickup:
• Press <ENTER>. The value appears on the me-
ter and at the same time displays numerically in
the THIS window.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 7
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Measurement Options Menu (Static)

• Using the up and down arrow keys, adjust the

full scale range, if required.
• When you are satisfied with the measurement’s
accuracy, press <ENTER> to record the value.

¾ For manually entered measurements, a

pointer bar appears in the THIS window.

• Manually enter the observed value through the

keyboard and press <ENTER>. The value en-
tered is displayed on the meter.
The data fields on the screen of Figure 1 - 3 are:

ID (top line of Working Area) - Up to 20 characters.

Description (next line under ID) - Up to 32 characters.

¾ Together, the ID and Description identify

the equipment and the exact location
where a measurement is to be recorded.

Date and Time of current measurement.

Current Measurements Value - Overall value of measure-

ment for the current measurement.

Last Reading - Overall value of the previous measurement.

Measurement Options Menu (Static)

When the Dynamic Data Point screen is visible on the Mi-
crolog, you may press the MENU key to access several op-
tions.

1 - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Measurement Options Menu (Static)

To make a selection, press its numeral on the Microlog’s

keypad or move the pointer bar to your selection and press
<ENTER>.
110.pcx

Figure 1 - 4.
The Options Menu for a Speed Measurement.

The Options on the screen of Figure 1 - 4 are:

1:Skip Machine - Moves the pointer bar to the first meas-

urement POINT in the next SET. (The list must be in
a hierarchy form.)

2:Skip Point - Moves the pointer bar to the next measure-

ment POINT.

3:Previous Point - Moves the pointer bar to the previous

POINT.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 9
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Measurement Options Menu (Static)

¾ The pointer bar may be shifted to the pre-

vious or next measurement POINT with
the up and down arrow keys when the
ROUTE list is visible. When the
Microlog is in the data acquisition mode,
the up and down arrow keys control the
amplitude gain range.

4:Make Reading - Used to repeat a measurement. If still

on the correct measurement POINT, this function may
be activated from the function keypad by pressing the
RESET MEASMT function key.

5:Coded Notes - Notes on a list are transferred from the

PRISM host software database. The list is displayed
by selecting Coded Notes.

> To store desired coded notes with the data collected for
the POINT:
• Use the up and down arrow keys to position the
pointer bar over the coded note desired.
• Press F1 to store the note code with the data col-
lected for the POINT.

¾ Multiple coded notes can be selected for

the same measurement POINT in this fash-
ion.

• When all the applicable notes have been se-

lected, press <ENTER> to save.

¾ Pressing the <ESCAPE> key aborts the

process without saving any coded notes.

6:User Note - Allows you to key in a note or an observa-

tion in English. The line displayed for User Note has

1 - 10 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

a capacity of 42 characters, however only the first 30

spaces are initially displayed. When the end of the in-
itially displayed line is reached, entering more charac-
ters causes the line to scroll left in the window until
the line fills to its capacity of 42 characters. The en-
tire 42 character line is saved and transferred to the
host.

¾ At a single measurement POINT, either a

User Note or Coded Note may be re-
corded but not both. The most recent
User Note or series of Coded Notes over-
write any notes recorded previously for
the same measurement POINT.

7:Manual Read - Allows you to make a manual reading

by entering a value through the keypad.

8:View Setup - Displays the current POINT’s setup infor-

mation.

9:Delete Data - Erases all data recorded for a POINT.

Dynamic Measurements
You may select either of two methods for displaying dy-
namic data collected in a ROUTE. The selection, Route
Spectrum:Show or Route Spectrum:Hide, is made from
the 6:Route Setup menu in the 8:Utilities main menu (see
Chapter 8, Utilities).
In Route Spectrum:Hide, the Dynamic Data Point sum-
mary screen is the only screen you will see (Figure 1 - 5).

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 11
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

test.pcx

Figure 1 - 5. A Dynamic Data Point Screen.

In Route Spectrum:Show the display shifts to an FFT

spectrum (Figure 1 - 6) when the data collection process be-
gins.

1 - 12 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

screen07.pcx

Figure 1 - 6. An FFT Spectrum Screen.

Route Spectrum:Show
> To start the collection process at the ROUTE menu:
• Select 1:Route to display the ROUTE list.
• Using the up and down arrow keys, move the
pointer bar to the starting ROUTE name, SET
name, or POINT and press <ENTER> to begin.
The Dynamic Data Point screen displays the first POINT
of the ROUTE or SET you selected, the SET name in the
hierarchy, or the POINT name you selected (see Figure 1 -
5).
The data fields on the screen are:

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 9 for descriptions of Dy-

namic Data Point fields Id and Descrip-
tion.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 13
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

Date and Time of current measurement.

This - Overall value and unit of measurement for the cur-

rent measurement.

Last Reading - Overall value of the previous measurement.

% Change - Percent of change between the current overall

value and the measurement’s last overall value.

AVG - Number of averages taken. The word DONE ap-

pears when all averages have been taken.

Alarms - Alarm values exceeded (i.e., ALARM1,

ALARM2).

¾ The Microlog may be programmed to re-

cord an FFT spectrum whenever an alarm
value is exceeded.

BAR GRAPH - A horizontal bar graph, located below the

value and alarm boxes, graphically displays the over-
all value. Alarm setpoints, represented by small verti-
cal marks directly below the bar graph, show the
physical relationship between overall value and alarm
setpoints. In Route Spectrum:Hide the overall value
is displayed on the horizontal bar graph throughout
the data collection process.

Speed Tagging
Speed tagging allows for very accurate speed values for dy-
namic Microlog measurements, even in variable speed ma-
chinery.
Using PRISM4 software, you can quickly select multiple
POINTs (Microlog dynamic POINTs) from the hierarchy
list (these POINTs are referred to as speed tagged POINTs)

1 - 14 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

to associate with (link to) a specific Microlog dynamic or

manual input speed reference POINT.
The speed reference POINT can be a tach POINT, dynamic
data POINT, or manually input speed value. Data collected
for the speed tagged POINTs reflect the rotating speed of
their associated speed reference POINT.

¾ For dynamic speed reference POINTs, use

either Order Track frequency type based
POINTs with a tach, or use Fixed Span fre-
quency type and use the Microlog’s Set
Speed (1XRPM) feature to determine the
speed value for the speed reference
POINT and its associated speed tagged
POINTs.

¾ IMPORTANT - The speed reference

POINT (Speed POINT Id) must be col-
lected (by the Microlog) prior to collecting
its speed tagged dynamic data POINTs.
Set up your PRISM4 ROUTE or database
hierarchy to facilitate data collection of
speed POINTs prior to data collection of
POINTs associated with speed POINTs.

¾ The speed reference POINT cannot be in-

cluded in an MPA group of POINTs, how-
ever, dynamic data POINTs linked to the
speed reference POINT may be (see the
Multi-POINT Automation section later
in this chapter).
Speed Ratio
The Microlog determines the actual running speed for
a linked measurement by multiplying its associated
speed reference POINT’s speed value by the speed

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 15
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

tagged measurement’s Speed Ratio (specified in

PRISM4).

¾ IMPORTANT - The dynamic measure-

ment’s Speed Ratio setting must be
greater than 0. A 0 setting disables speed
tagging. In this case, the measurement’s
speed value is established using the meas-
urement’s Speed field setting (manually
input in the POINT Setup dialog).
Error Messages
If the linked speed reference POINT does not precede
the speed tagged dynamic data POINT in the
Microlog’s ROUTE list, speed tagging is disabled and
the following message appears when attempting to col-
lect data for the speed tagged dynamic data POINT:
WARNING!
Running Speed (RPM) point used for Speed
Tagged Point (Point Id) has not been down-
loaded.
ENTER - to collect data using point setup’s de-
fault speed value.
ESC - to abort data collection.

• Press ENTER to collect data. The measure-

ment’s speed value is calculated using the meas-
urement’s Speed field setting (manually input in
the POINT Setup dialog) multiplied by the meas-
urement’s Speed Ratio value. Again, speed tag-
ging is disabled.
If the speed reference POINT has been downloaded to
the Microlog in the proper hierarchy position but no
data has been taken on it, the following message ap-

1 - 16 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

pears when attempting to collect data on its associated

speed tagged dynamic POINTs:
ERROR!
Running Speed (RPM) point used for Speed
Tagged Point (Point Id) has not been collected.
Please take data on (Point Id) before taking
data on this point.
ESC - to abort data collection.
Speed reference POINT data (RPM) can be re-collected as
often as the user chooses, however, speed tagged POINTs
linked to the speed reference POINT are not updated with a
new speed value unless they too are re-collected after the
speed reference POINT is re-collected.

> To continue data collection:

Press <ENTER> to start data collection. An FFT screen
displays. The amplitude range, frequency range, and num-
ber of averages have already been set in the PRISM host
software’s POINT SETUP screen for all ROUTE
POINTs. For NonRoute POINTs, set these parameters in
the Spectrum Setup screen. Watch the number of aver-
ages above the upper left corner of the spectrum display.
You will see it advancing 1/N, 2/N, 3/N, etc., indicating
progress toward a preset number (N) of averages. Averag-
ing proceeds to the specified number of averages, then data
collection stops. Upon completion of averaging, press
<ENTER> to record the overall value and spectrum and re-
turn to the measurement menu.

¾ If you are not satisfied with the amplitude

display, you may adjust the full scale am-
plitude with the up and down arrow keys
during the averaging process.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 17
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

Note that a vertical bar graph is present at the right edge of

the spectrum display. This vertical bar graph displays the
overall value calculated from the spectrum. The alarm
markers on the side of the bar graph denote alarm levels set
in the PRISM host software. Alarm markers are filled in if
the alarm is exceeded (see Figure 1 - 7), hollow if not ex-
ceeded.
Also, note that the word OVERALL appears at the top of
the spectrum display (Figure 1 - 7). This indicates that the
numerical value to the left of the word OVERALL is the
overall amplitude calculated from the spectrum.
ch6-03.pcx

overall amplitude

alarm
marker

overall
amplitude

Figure 1 - 7. Where Overall Amplitude Appears.

Pressing the right and left arrow keys moves the cursor on
the spectrum display. At the same time, the word OVER-
ALL disappears and the amplitude and frequency at the
cursor position displays (Figure 1 - 8).

1 - 18 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

ch6-02.pcx

amplitude at the
cursor position
frequency at
the cursor
position

.227

2775.0 Figure 1 - 8.
Where Data for the Cursor Position Displays.
Press F1 to toggle to Overall Data.

Pressing F1 toggles the numerical display from ampli-

tude/frequency at the cursor position to overall value and
from overall value to amplitude/frequency at the cursor po-
sition.
When the averaging process completes, collection stops
and the FFT spectrum remains on the screen.

> To save acceptable spectra:

• Press <ENTER> (or SAVE) to save and leave
the spectrum display.

¾ If you are not satisfied with the spectrum,

you may retake the measurement by press-
ing the key labeled RESET MEASMT on
the function keypad. In Route Mode:Nor-

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 19
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Dynamic Measurements

mal, the Microlog collector returns to the

current POINT’s Dynamic Data Point
screen, from which you may make note en-
tries (see the next section: Measurement
Options Menu). For faster data collec-
tion, set the Microlog to Route
Mode:Auto in the 8:Utilities main menu.
The current POINT’s Dynamic Data
Point screen does not re-display, but the
Microlog proceeds directly to the Dy-
namic Data Point screen for the next
POINT.

Route Spectrum:Hide
In Route Spectrum:Hide, the Microlog averages continu-
ously and proceeds to the specified number of averages.
When the specified number of averages is attained, the
Microlog continues to collect data. Each subsequent data
sample replaces the earliest sample. This moving average
continues until you press <ENTER> a second time to save
the data. Saving data records the overall value—and the
FFT spectrum when required.
Route Spectrum:Hide can make ROUTE data collection
somewhat faster than Route Spectrum:Show. Hide
slightly reduces the time required to complete a given num-
ber of averages by eliminating the processing required to
update the FFT spectrum display. In Route Spec-
trum:Hide, the overall value is displayed on the horizontal
bar graph throughout the data collection process.
When you press <ENTER> to save, status indicators are
provided in the upper right side of the Dynamic Data
Point display indicating the types of data stored.

1 - 20 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Measurement Options Menu (Dynamic)

Letters corresponding to data stored are:

O Overall Value
S FFT Spectrum
N Notes
P Phase
T Time Domain

Measurement Options Menu (Dynamic)

With the Dynamic Data Point screen visible on the
Microlog, you may press the MENU key to access several
options.
• To make a selection, press its numeral on the Mi-
crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to your
selection and press <ENTER>(see Figure 1 - 4).
The Options on the screen of Figure 1 - 4 are:
1:Skip Machine 5:Coded Notes
2:Skip Point 6:User Note
3:Previous Point 7:Manual Read
4:Make Reading 8:View Setup
9:Delete Data

¾ Refer to pages 1-10 and 1-12 for descrip-

tions of the above Options Menu choices.

Using a Temporarily Attached Pickup

If a vibration measurement is being made with a temporar-
ily attached pickup (such as the CMSS92C handheld vibra-
tion probe), the pickup should be placed in contact with the
machine before you initiate a measurement with the <EN-
TER> key. If the vibration probe is placed in contact with
the machine after the measurement is started, place the
pickup in contact with the machine and press

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 21
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Hints for Efficient Data Collection

RESET MEASMT or <ESCAPE> and re-take data for

the same POINT again. The new data overwrites the old.
Averaged data can be erased at any time and the averaging
process restarted from zero by simply taking data for the
same POINT again.
If your handheld probe has an <ENTER> button, you may
perform all tasks requiring the <ENTER> key with the
thumb of the hand you are using to hold the probe in place.

Hints for Efficient Data Collection

Reducing Keystrokes
Aside from the Microlog’s Multi-Point Automation fea-
ture described at the end of this chapter, there are other
ways the Microlog collector can be set to minimize the
number of keystrokes required during ROUTE collection.
Setting Route Mode:Normal in 6:Route Setup in the
8:Utilities main menu (see the Utilities chapter) requires
one keystroke to collect an FFT spectrum, a second key-
stroke to exit the FFT display when spectrum averaging is
complete, and a third keystroke to advance the collector to
the next POINT. When Route Mode:Auto is selected, en-
tering a measurement advances the pointer bar to the next
measurement POINT without additional keystrokes.
The fastest (but perhaps not the best) way to collect
ROUTE data is to use the following settings in 8:Utili-
ties/Route Setup, see Chapter 8, Utilities:
Route Mode:Auto
Route Spectrum:Hide
Sensor Mode:Always On
Route Collection:Fast
Auto Range:Off

1 - 22 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Hints for Efficient Data Collection

¾ Use AutoRange:Off only when full scale

for each POINT is set to a value large
enough that no overload conditions occur,
otherwise AutoRange:On is recognized.
In both Route Spectrum:Hide and Route Spec-
trum:Show, you may manually record an FFT spectrum,
whether or not required by programming, by pressing the
SAVE function key.

Auto Range
The Microlog collector can be configured for manual
(Auto Range:Off) or auto amplitude range (Auto
Range:On). See the Utilities chapter for more detail. For
Auto Range:Off, the Microlog sets the amplitude range to
the value downloaded to the Microlog from the PRISM
host software’s database.
The Microlog will not allow dynamic data to be collected
during overload state. The Microlog reports input signals
too large for the display with an OVERLOAD SIGNAL
banner on the screen, and with the overload indicator (OV)
in the center of the status line (top line) of the display. If a
signal overload is indicated, the full scale amplitude range
should be increased to prevent amplitude errors. During
data collection, the full scale amplitude range may be in-
creased or decreased from the Dynamic Data Point or FFT
displays with the up and down arrow keys.
Whether Auto Range:Off or Auto Range:On is set, the
amplitude range may always be increased and decreased
manually during data collection by pressing the up and
down arrow keys.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 23
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
To Make An On-the-Spot Analysis

The Probe
If a magnetic or permanently mounted sensor is not used,
it is important that you hold the probe steady and with even
pressure. The Microlog’s high speed acquisition requires
only a few seconds to collect the averaged FFT spectrum
that experience has demonstrated is necessary for accurate
trending and analysis.
If the vibration probe loses contact or if you are forced to
discontinue collection averages for other reasons, such as
an ambient temperature too hot to continue holding the
probe in place, the averaging process can be stopped at any
time by pressing <ENTER>. Recognizing this possibility,
the Microlog divides by the number of averages actually
collected rather than by the number specified. Thus, as an
FFT spectrum is being averaged, the values stored and dis-
played are accurate for the number of averages collected up
to that point. If the averaging process has to be stopped af-
ter three or four averages, the reduction in accuracy is usu-
ally minimal.

To Make An On-the-Spot Analysis

You may do a preliminary analysis on collected FFT Spec-
tra. A movable cursor, controlled by left and right arrow
keys, is provided to give you an accurate value of both am-
plitude and frequency of individual spectral components on
the Microlog’s display.
Digital values of amplitude, frequency, and multiple of OR-
DER of machine running speed at the cursor position are
displayed in the lines directly above the spectrum.
If running speed was not set correctly in the host or is not
the actual running speed (for example, in a variable speed
machine), running speed may be set from the spectrum dis-
play.

1 - 24 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Spectral Banding

> To set running speed from the spectrum display:

• Place the cursor on the component in the spec-
trum identified as running speed.
• Press the 1XRPM key.
The order displayed above the spectrum changes to 1.0.
The speed established is recorded with the spectrum and
transferred back to the host computer as a permanent re-
cord of actual running speed at the time the spectrum was
collected. This ensures orders are correctly listed on any
subsequent printouts.

¾ FAM marker frequencies are also updated

using the new running speed.
Several other valuable analyzer functions are initiated by
pressing labeled keys in the function keypad. Applicable
keys and their functions are described in the Analyzer
chapter.

Spectral Banding
Spectral Banding provides alert and danger alarms on
both peak and overall spectral values within a defined fre-
quency band.
The Microlog has the capability to process and display up
to 12 spectral bands that have been pre-defined and down-
loaded from a PRISM host software database.
On the Microlog, defined spectral bands appear on the dis-
played spectrum. Peak values and setpoints appear as
dashed lines, while Overall values and setpoints appear as
solid lines.

¾ In order to view spectral bands, the

Microlog’s 8:Utilities menu Route Spec-
trum option must be set to Show.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 25
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Spectral Banding

¾ The overall for each band is calculated us-

ing the same detection method (RMS,
Peak to Peak, or Peak) as specified for the
POINT’s overall.
An A or D is displayed above the Peak Level line or Over-
all Level line when an alarm condition occurs.
A - Alert
D - Danger.
At any time during data collection, press the PgDn key to
view the Spectral Band Setup. Information on the Spec-
tral Band Setup screen includes:

From (CPM) - The spectral band’s low frequency limit in

CPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

To (CPM) - The spectral band’s high frequency limit in

CPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Dan - The band’s peak danger level (alarm limit). Set

in the PRISM host software.

Pk Wrn - The band’s peak alert level (alarm limit). Set in

the PRISM host software.

Ov Dan - The band’s overall danger level (alarm limit).

Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Wrn - The band’s overall alert level (alarm limit). Set

in the PRISM host software.

Band Pk - The band’s current highest peak level. Updated

for every new FFT data buffer.

1 - 26 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Spectral Banding

Band Ov - The band’s current overall level. Calculated us-

ing the following equation:


√ high
∑ 2
(Fi )
i = low
OA =
√
NBF
Where:
OA = overall level of vibration
low = index of the band’s first FFT line
high = index of the band’s last FFT line
Fi = amplitude of each of the FFT lines
NBF = noise bandwidth for window chosen
Noise Bandwidth:
Chosen Window NBF
Uniform 1.0
Flat Top 3.782893
Hanning 1.499512

Status - Displays alarm status as follows:

OvD - Overall danger. Shown when the band’s over-
all level >= the overall danger limit.
PkD - Peak danger. Shown when the band’s peak
level >= the peak danger limit.
OvA - Overall alert. Shown when the band’s overall
level >= the overall alert limit.
PkA - Peak alert. Shown when the peak level >=the
peak alert limit.
OK - No Alarms.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 27
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Downloading FAM Information

¾ After saving spectral band data (by press-

ing the SAVE button), the spectrum with
spectral bands displayed may be viewed
using the Review Menu and printed using
the Reports Menu. This report includes
Dynamic Points Report with bands dis-
played and a second page containing a
SPECTRAL BANDING SUMMARY.
This summary contains the same informa-
tion as the Spectral Band Setup informa-
tion.
When alarm levels are exceeded, spectral band alarms are
displayed and saved for reporting in the Microlog’s Excep-
tions report. Spectral band alarms are not uploaded to
PRISM2, instead, once data is uploaded, PRISM2 recalcu-
lates the spectral bands and generates alarms for POINTs
exceeding spectral band alarm levels.

Downloading FAM Information

¾ FAM information must be set up in
PRISM4 before downloading to the Mi-
crolog.
The Microlog has the capability to process and display
bearing fault frequency information associated with
POINTs that have been pre-defined and downloaded from
a PRISM host software database.

> To download FAM data from PRISM4:

• From the Microlog’s Main menu, press 3 or
move the pointer bar to 3:Transfer and press
<ENTER>. The Transfer screen appears and
the Microlog is ready to communicate with its
host.

1 - 28 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Downloading FAM Information

• From PRISM4’s Transfer menu, select Down-

load/From ROUTE List or Download/From
Active Hierarchy.
• Check the Download FAM Information check
box and click the dialog’s checkmark command
button. FAM information is downloaded along
with the ROUTE to the connected Microlog.
When collecting data for a FAM POINT, the Microlog
automatically overlays up to four multiples of bearing fault
frequency marker. For example, up to four multiples of
each BPFI are displayed first, pressing the PGDN key dis-
plays up to four more BPFI multiples. When there are no
more BPFI multiples, then up to four multiples of BPFO
are displayed, etc. Bearing fault freq. markers are labeled
(as defined in PRISM4) as multiples of FTF, BSF, BPFO,
and BPFI (Figure 1 - 9).
fam-1.pcx

bearing identifier
for the bearing
fault frequency
markers
Figure 1 - 9.
Spectrum Displaying Fault Frequency Labels.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 29
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Downloading FAM Information

The Microlog places each FAM marker above the highest

peak in the marker’s frequency range (center freq. +/-
(bandwidth / 2)).

¾ Center freq. calculation is Speed Tagging

compatible.
When a new running speed is selected, press 1XRPM to re-
calculate FAM marker locations.
• Press <ENTER> to save data. The FAM NU-
MERICAL screen displays (Figure 1 - 10).
fam-2.pcx

Figure 1 - 10. The FAM NUMERICAL Screen.

FAM NUMERICAL screen fields are:

LABEL - The bearing Identifier and Label as defined in

PRISM4.

1 - 30 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
Downloading FAM Information

AMPLITUDE - The amplitude at which the highest peak

occurs within the FAM center freq. and bandwidth fre-
quency range.

FREQUENCY - The frequency at which the highest peak

occurs within the FAM center freq. and bandwidth fre-
quency range.
• Press <ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamic
Data Point screen.

> To view the POINT’s FAM information:

• At the Dynamic Data Point display, press
MENU, the Options pop-up menu displays.
Press 8 or move the pointer bar to 8:View Setup
and press <ENTER>. The POINT DESCRIP-
TION screen displays.
• Press F3, the FAM Data Setup screen displays
(Figure 1 - 11).
fam-4.pcx

Figure 1 - 11. The FAM Data Setup Screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 31
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
Multi-Point Automation (MPA)

FAM Number - The Microlog assigns this number sequen-

tially, according to the number of fault frequencies de-
fined in PRISM4 for this POINT.
The remaining information displays as defined in PRISM4
for each fault frequency.
• To view information for additional pre-defined
fault frequencies, press the right/left arrow keys.
• Press ESCAPE to return to the Dynamic Data
Point screen.

Multi-Point Automation (MPA)

The CMVA60 Microlog data collector allows the user to
configure up to 12 measurements for automatic data collec-
tion at one measurement point. Using the same sensor, the
user need press only one button to sequentially collect all
pre-configured measurements.

¾ The speed reference POINT cannot be in-

cluded in an MPA group of POINTs, how-
ever, dynamic data POINTs linked to the
speed reference POINT may be.

MPA ROUTE Setup

> To set up a MPA ROUTE:
• In your PRISM software, access the Point Setup
screen. The Point Setup screen’s Description
field is used to identify MPA POINTs. The first
4 characters in the Description field identify the
MPA group to which the POINT being config-
ured belongs. For MPA POINTs, the first char-
acter in the Description field is always "@". The
@ character must be followed by three alpha/nu-

1 - 32 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

meric characters that identify the group of MPA

POINTs. For example;
@MT1 VELOCITY
@MT1 ACCEL
@MT1 ACC ENV
are legal Descriptions for three MPA POINTs col-
lected at the same location on a motor. For three
additional POINTs collected at a second location
on the motor;
@MT2 VELOCITY
@MT2 ACCEL
@MT2 ACC ENV
might be appropriate Descriptions.

¾ If more than 12 POINTs are defined, the

CMVA60 collects data for the first 12
MPA POINTs and the remaining MPA
POINTS are ignored.

MPA Group Data Collection

When the Microlog collector is first powered up, the re-
verse video pointer bar in the main menu appears on the
1:Route choice. Press <ENTER> to display the ROUTE
list.
• Highlight and press <ENTER> to select the
ROUTE to collect.
While collecting POINTs in a ROUTE, when the Mi-
crolog encounters an MPA group of POINTs, it auto-
matically displays the MPA data collection screen
(Figure 1 - 12).

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 33
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

mpascr.pcx

Figure 1 - 12.
An MPA Data Collection Screen.

• With the highlight at the top of the list, press

<ENTER> to automatically collect all MPA
POINTs in the group.

¾ Before pressing <ENTER> to collect

data, you can move the highlight to vari-
ous POINTs in the MPA group to display
details for the highlighted POINT in the
screen’s CURRENT MEASUREMENT
section. However, be sure to return to the
top of the list before pressing <ENTER>,
as data collection proceeds from the high-
lighted POINT.

1 - 34 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

¾ Depending on the View MPA Spectrum

setting in Utilities/Route Setup, the Mi-
crolog displays the corresponding spec-
trum (including any FAM or spectral band
information) allowing the operator to in-
spect and verify that data is correct. Press
SAVE to continue collecting data for the
remaining triaxial MPA POINTs or press
<ESCAPE> to cancel data collection.

¾ If a non-MPA POINT is encountered

within an MPA group, data collection will
stop for the remaining MPA POINTs.
When the next MPA POINT is encoun-
tered, it is considered a new MPA group.
MPA Data Collection screen items are:

A list of all POINTs in the MPA group (maximum of 12).

When data collection is complete for all POINTs the
word DONE appears at the bottom of the list.

Value - Stored overall value for this measurement.

Units - Units for this measurement.

Alarms - Highest alarm value exceeded for this measure-

ment.
Current Measurement Information

ID - Identifies the current POINT’s name.

DESC - A brief description of the identified POINT.

THIS - Overall value of the current measurement.

LAST - Overall value of the previous measurement.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 35
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

ALARMS - Highest alarm value exceeded. Example: if

A1 and A2 exists, A2 is displayed.

¾ MPA alarm indicator strings are consistent

with PRISM2 and PRISM4 for Windows.
Alarm indicator strings are:
A1 = Overall Alarm 1
A2 = Overall Alarm 2
a = Banding Peak Alert
d = Banding Peak Danger
A = Banding Overall Alert
D = Banding Overall Danger

AVG - Displays the number of averages during data collec-

tion for each MPA POINT and displays DONE when
the MPA POINT is done.

% Change - Percent of change between the current overall

value and the measurement’s last overall value.

BAR GRAPH - A horizontal bar graph located below the

CURRENT MEASUREMENT information graphi-
cally displays the overall value. Alarm setpoints, rep-
resented by small vertical marks directly below the
bar graph, show the physical relationship between
overall value and alarm setpoints.

Options
Certain MPA options are available.
• With the MPA data collection screen displayed,
press the MENU key. The Options pop-up
menu displays. Press a numeral on the Mi-
crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to your
selection and press <ENTER>.

1 - 36 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

mpaopt.pcx

Figure 1 - 13. The MPA Options Menu.

MPA Options are:

1:Skip Machine - Skips all MPA POINTs and subsequent

POINTs in current Machine and proceeds to the next
machine in ROUTE.

2:Skip MPA Set - Skips all MPA POINTs and proceeds to

the next POINT, or group of POINTs, in the ROUTE.

3:Previous MPA Set/Point - Moves the pointer bar to the

previous MPA Set/POINT.

¾ The pointer bar may be shifted to the pre-

vious or next measurement MPA
Group/POINT with the up and down ar-
row keys when the ROUTE list is visible.
When the Microlog is in the data acquisi-
tion mode, the up and down arrow keys
control the amplitude gain range.

4:Coded Notes - Notes on a list are transferred from the

PRISM host software database. The list is displayed
by selecting Coded Notes.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 37
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

¾ PRISM4 allows inputing a 38 character

Coded Note. The Microlog’s Coded
Note screen displays only the first 27 char-
acters of the Coded Note downloaded
from the PRISM software.

> To store desired coded notes with the data collected for
the POINT:
• Use the up and down arrow keys to position the
pointer bar over the coded note desired.
• Press F1 to store the note code with the data col-
lected for the MPA POINT.

¾ Multiple coded notes can be selected for

the same measurement MPA POINT in
this fashion.

• When all the applicable notes have been se-

lected, press <ENTER> to save.

¾ Pressing the <ESCAPE> key aborts the

process without saving any coded notes.

5:User Note - Allows you to key in a note or an observa-

tion in English. The line displayed for User Note has
a capacity of 42 characters, however only the first 30
spaces are initially displayed. When the end of the in-
itially displayed line is reached, entering more charac-
ters causes the line to scroll left in the window until
the line fills to its capacity of 42 characters. The en-
tire 42 character line is saved and transferred to the
host.

1 - 38 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

¾ At a single measurement MPA POINT,

either a User Note or Coded Note may be
recorded but not both. The most recent
User Note or series of Coded Notes over-
write any notes recorded previously for
the same measurement MPA POINT.

6:View Setup - Summarizes all information related to the

current MPA POINT.

7:Delete MPA Set Data - Erases all data recorded for all
of the POINTs in the current MPA Group.

CMVA60 Microlog 1 - 39
User Manual change 01
The Route Menu
MPA Group Data Collection

(This page intentionally blank)

1 - 40 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 3-9-92 8:55 S.G.

2
The NonRoute Menu

Overview
NONROUTE allows you to take data at measurement
POINTs which have not been previously downloaded to
the Microlog from PRISM host software.

Setup
To simplify the setup procedure, two User Modes are avail-
able, Analysis and Normal. These modes are selected
from the System Setup menu in the 8:Utilities function
(see the Utilities chapter).
User Mode:Analysis provides access to all Analyzer
functions.
User Mode:Normal simplifies Analyzer operation
by hiding option values for a number of options used
primarily for highly specialized analyses.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 1
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Overview

01.pcx

Figure 2 - 1.
The CMVA60 Microlog Main Menu.

In NonRoute (Figure 2 - 1), you can perform the required

setup in your Microlog collector and immediately collect
data without returning to your host computer. The meas-
urement set up in the Microlog at the time of data collec-
tion is transferred to the host and can be merged into your
permanent PRISM host software database.
With the following two exceptions, NonRoute is identical
to Route as described in the Chapter 1, The Route
Menu.
• The information necessary to define a measure-
ment POINT must be manually programmed
into the Microlog.
• The Measurement Options menu (Figure 2 -
2) does not include Skip Point, Skip Machine,
and Previous Point (see Figure 1 - 4), which
are not applicable for NonRoute.

2 - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Types of Measurements

screen46.pcx

Figure 2 - 2.
The NonRoute Process
Point Options Menu.

Types of Measurements
Four types of measurements may be configured and col-
lected in NonRoute mode (Figure 2 - 3).
02.pcx

Figure 2 - 3. The NonRoute Menu.

1:Dynamic - A vibration or AC voltage. Corresponds to

vibration dynamic data collected in Route.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 3
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Dynamic Measurements (Overview)

2:Process - A static value in DC volts, such as tempera-

ture, obtained with a directly connected pickup, or
read from an installed instrument and entered manu-
ally through the keypad.

3:HFD (High Frequency Detection) - A dynamic high

frequency input from an accelerometer for assessing
the condition of rolling element ball or roller bear-
ings. The HFD measurement has a detected overall
value from 5 KHz to 60 KHz but does not record a
spectrum.

4:Running Speed - Pulse input proportional to rotating

frequency or enter manually using the keypad.

Dynamic Measurements (Overview)

> To set up for taking dynamic measurements:
• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer
bar to 2:NonRoute and press < ENTER> .
The screen in Figure 2 - 3 displays.
• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Dynamic
and press < ENTER> . The screen in Figure 2
- 4 displays.

2 - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Dynamic Measurements (Overview)

03.pcx

Figure 2 - 4. The Dynamic Menu.

Dynamic screen menus are:

1:Take Data - Samples and displays data according to the

configuration of the Setup menus.

2:Input Setup - Displays fields for designating the

POINT ID and Description, measurement type, full
scale range, units, type of detection, input sensitivity,
low frequency cut-off, and RPM.

3:Spectrum Setup - FFT configuration such as lines of

resolution, measurement type, frequency range, num-
ber of averages, average type, average mode, average
overlap, and window type.

4:Display Setup - Defines type of trace (single or dual),

type of display (magnitude, time, phase), full scale of
the vertical (phase) axis, and cursor type.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 5
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Input Setup

5:Trigger Setup - (In User Mode:Analysis only) Config-

ures trigger mode, trigger source, trigger slope, trig-
ger level, trigger delay, and number of pulses per
revolution.

¾ The length per revolution function has not

yet been implemented.

6:Marker Setup - (In User Mode:Analysis only) Allows

selection of harmonic, relative, or sideband markers.
The fundamental marker may be positioned by cursor
location or by key entry of frequency.

Input Setup
The Input Setup menu contains fields for recording ID
and Description, designating type of measurement, full
scale range, detection method, transducer sensitivity, low
frequency cutoff, and RPM.
04.pcx

Figure 2 - 5. The Input Setup Fields.

2 - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Input Setup

> To access the Input Setup menu:

• At the Dynamic menu, press 2 or move the
pointer bar to 2:Input Setup and press < EN-
TER> (Figure 2 - 5).

Input Setup fields are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identify

the equipment and the exact location
where a measurement is to be recorded.

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Type).

¾ In Analyzer mode (from the main menu),

the ID field is generally not filled until a
displayed dynamic signal is to be re-
corded (saved). At that time pressing the
SAVE key causes a window to appear on
the dynamic display in which the ID may
be entered (Figure 2 - 6).

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 7
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Input Setup

07.pcx

Figure 2 - 6. Field To Enter POINT ID.

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity,

displacement, volts, pressure, SEE, or envelope)
which depends upon the type of seismic sensor used
(accelerometer, velocity pickup, proximity probe, or
SEE sensor) is required to establish integration re-
quirements for the FFT calculation. Press MENU to
view the choices.

• Select your choice for Type of measurement

with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Full Scale).

¾ If you selected ENV Acc or ENV Vel, an

additional field displays named ENV Fil-
ter.

2 - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Input Setup

ENV Filter - Press MENU to view the choices.

5 Hz - 100 Hz
50 Hz - 1 KHz
500 Hz - 10 KHz
5 KHz - 40 KHz

• Select your choice of filter range and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Full Scale).

Full Scale - The units for this field were automatically de-
termined when you selected Type:.

• Enter a numerical full scale value and press

< ENTER> . (Note that this value may also be
altered, when in the spectrum display, with the
up and down arrow keys.). The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Detec-
tion).

¾ If the number 0.0 is entered for the Full

Scale entry, autoranging and autoscaling
result.

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

The following table lists the Microlog’s method of sig-
nal detection and scaling for overall dynamic measure-
ments. Note that acceleration, velocity, and
displacement values obtained from an accelerometer
or velocity pickup are always scaled from RMS detec-
tion. This replicates the measurement method used
with most older instruments so newer Microlog re-
corded values remain equivalent.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 9
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Input Setup

DETECTION
INPUT OUTPUT Peak Pk to Pk RMS
Acceleration Acceleration Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Acceleration Velocity Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Acceleration Displacement Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Velocity Velocity Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Velocity Displacement Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Displacement Displacement True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
Voltage Voltage True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
Pressure Pressure True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
SEE SEE True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
ENV/ACC ENV/ACC True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
ENV/VEL ENV/VEL True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS

• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS, or Pk

to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Input).

2 - 10 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Input Setup

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) per

Engineering Unit (EU) and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the screen
(Low Freq Cutoff).

Low Freq Cutoff - Enter the low frequency cutoff desired

for the spectrum display. The overall value is com-
puted based on the spectral components within the in-
terval between low frequency cutoff and the
maximum frequency.

• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances

to the next field on the screen (RPM).

RPM - Enter nominal running speed of the machine from

which data is being acquired and press < ENTER> .

¾ The Microlog computes the RPM of the

machine, displays it on the spectrum
screen, uses it to calculate orders, stores
it with the dynamic data, and transfers it
to the host. For triggered points, the
Microlog sets RPM equal to tachometer
pulse rate/pulses per revolution, as set in
the trigger setup. For non-triggered
points, the Microlog sets RPM equal to
the value in this Input Setup screen un-
less the 1XRPM key is pressed during
spectrum display. If so, the Microlog sets
RPM equal to the frequency at the cursor.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamic

setup selection menu.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 11
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup

Spectrum Setup
The Spectrum Setup screen contains fields for recording
number of lines of resolution, measurement type, starting
and maximum frequency, number of averages, average
type, average mode, average overlap, and spectrum win-
dow type.
13.pcx

Figure 2 - 7. The Spectrum Setup Fields.

> To access the Spectrum Setup menu:

• At the Dynamic menu, press 3 or move the
pointer bar to 3:Spectrum Setup and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar displays on
Lines (Figure 2 - 7).

2 - 12 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup

Lines - Lines determines the basic resolution of the spec-

trum. Press MENU to view the choices.
frequency range
= frequency seqment size
lines resolution
1,000 Hz
= 2.5 Hz
400 lines
If, for example, you choose 400 lines and a frequency
range from 0 to 1,000 Hz, the basic resolution of the
spectrum will be 1,000 divided by 400 or 2.5 Hz.
This means that the x-axis is divided into 400 seg-
ments spaced 2.5 Hz apart.

¾ Recognize that increased resolution re-

quires increased time for data collection
and consumes more storage memory.

• Select your choice for number of Lines of reso-

lution with the pointer bar and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Measurement Type).

Measurement Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Frequency - Sets the horizontal axis of the spectrum
display in units of frequency.
Orders - Sets the horizontal axis of the spectrum dis-
play in orders (multiples of running speed). Requires
an external 1XRPM trigger that is phase referenced to
the rotating shaft.
• Select your choice for Measurement Type with
the pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Start Freq).

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 13
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

¾ The Spectrum Setup screens differ de-

pending on which of the Measurement
Types you choose: Frequency or Orders.
Each choice is discussed under a separate
heading below.

Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

Measurement Type:Freq sets the horizontal axis of the
spectrum display in units of frequency.
15.pcx

Figure 2 - 8. The Start Freq Field.

2 - 14 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

Measurement Type:Freq fields are:

Start Freq - The start frequency for the horizontal axis of

the spectrum display. Any start frequency less than
maximum frequency may be entered.

¾ The actual start frequency may differ

from your entered value. The Microlog
selects a start frequency close to your en-
tered value but based on its zoom algo-
rithm.
• Enter your choice of initial or start frequency of
the FFT spectrum and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Maximum Freq).

Maximum Freq - Enter any maximum frequency for the

horizontal axis of the spectrum display less than or
equal to 20,000 Hz or 1,200,000 CPM.

• Enter the maximum frequency of the FFT spec-

trum in Hz or CPM and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Number of Averages).

Number of Averages - If Average Type is Pk Hold, set

Number of Averages:1, and set Average
Mode:Cont. Since Average Mode:Cont is chosen,
the peak value is updated for each spectrum ensemble.
If Average Type is Average, set Number of Aver-
ages:6. This is a reasonable number of spectrum av-
erages to allow a POINT measurement to be made in
less than 10 seconds.
If an external trigger is available (time synchronous
averaging is allowable in Average Type), set Num-
ber of Averages to achieve adequate signal-to-noise

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 15
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

enhancement in the time domain (from 4 to above

200 depending on how close the conflicting signals
are).

• Enter the number of spectrum ensembles to be

summed (between 1 and 9999).
• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Average
Type).

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Off - Produces the same results as setting Average
Type:Average and Number of Averages:1. The
FFT displays components scaled by the selected
method of detection and updates at its maximum, real-
time rate.
Average - The summation of the magnitude of each
spectral line is divided by the total number of aver-
ages (ensemble averaging). This is the most fre-
quently used method of averaging for routine data
collection and analysis.
Pk Hold - Peak Hold holds the highest value received
at each spectral line during the averaging time. This
method of averaging is very useful when the signal
contains a great deal of amplitude variation and the
primary objective of the analysis is to see the maxi-
mum reached by each component.

¾ For time waveforms, Average Type:Aver-

age and Average Type:Pk Hold are not
recommended. Use Average Type:Sync
Time instead.

2 - 16 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

Sync(hronous) Time - Averaging in the time do-

main. This method of averaging requires a reference
trigger. Components within the signal which are syn-
chronous with the reference trigger are reinforced,
while noise quickly averages out. Synchronous time
domain averaging produces the most improvement in
signal to noise ratio, and is advantageous whenever it
is deemed necessary to extract very low amplitude sig-
nals or to minimize the “ noise” produced by the vi-
bration of other machines nearby. When this method
of averaging is selected, the spectrum produced and
displayed is the FFT of the averaged synchronous
time domain samples.

¾ To display Sync(hronous) Time averag-

ing set the Trigger Source to External.

• Select your choice for Average Type with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Average Mode).

Average Mode - Select the type of FFT average comple-

tion. Press MENU to view the choices.
Cont(inuous) - Averaging of the latest N samples,
where N is the number of averages selected for the
sample. Equivalent to exponential averaging where
the latest spectrum ensemble replaces the oldest in
the averaged sum.
Finite - Averaging proceeds for N samples. The aver-
aging process stops and the result is displayed. (This
is the averaging mode in Route Spectrum:Show dur-
ing Route data collection.)
Repeat - Averaging proceeds for N samples, where N
is the number of averages you chose for the sample.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 17
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

The spectrum average is displayed after N samples

are taken. The display is updated after each finite av-
erage.

• Select your choice for Average Mode with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Average Overlap).

Average Overlap - Overlap processing is advantageous

when the time required to gather a time record is
much longer than the time needed to calculate an
FFT spectrum. In the Microlog this occurs at fre-
quencies below 1,000 Hz (60,000 CPM).
For lower frequencies, the amount of overlap can be
increased to reduce the time required to collect a
given number of averages. Recognize, however, that
the greater the overlap, the more information shared
between averages. Press MENU to view the choices.
Max - Uses whatever data is in the time record at the
time. This can be existing data, new data, or a mix-
ture depending on how long it takes to collect time re-
cord data. Results in the shortest averaging time but
may lack statistical accuracy.
75% - Uses 75% of existing data and 25% of new
data to calculate new FFT.
50% - Uses 50% of existing data and 50% of new
data to calculate new FFT.
None - Each spectrum ensemble is new data added to
the sum.
Overlap processing is used to obtain enough new en-
semble data for an accurate average. If the maximum
frequency is low and the FFT process time is fast, the
average sum would include a high percent of old data

2 - 18 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Freq

with maximum overlap. Below 2 kHz, 50% overlap

and six averages is a reasonable ROUTE setup.

• Select your choice for Average Overlap with

the pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Window).

Window - The type of window used in the FFT process-

ing. A window function must be applied to any peri-
odic time record prior to performing an FFT to
minimize leakage errors. The Hanning and Flat Top
window functions attenuate to zero both the leading
and trailing edges of the time domain buffer (to pre-
vent leakage error caused by discontinuities in the
time record). Press MENU to view the choices.
Hanning - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-
tion that provides better frequency resolution than
Flat Top, but with reduced amplitude accuracy. Use-
ful for machine vibration measurements, general pur-
pose measurements, and measurements containing
random noise.
Uniform - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-
tion with uniform weighting across time. Useful for
measuring transients or mechanical response measure-
ments and in tracking mode.
Flat Top - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-
tion which provides the best amplitude accuracy for
measuring discrete frequency components. Useful
for calibration or machine vibration measurements us-
ing displacement probes in fluid-film bearings.

• Select your choice for Window with the pointer

bar and press < ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 19
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamic

setup selection menu.

Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders

Measurement Type:Orders - Sets the spectrum display’s
horizontal axis in orders (multiples of running speed). Re-
quires an external 1XRPM trigger that is phase referenced
to the rotating shaft.
Magnitude and absolute phase relative to the shaft refer-
ence are plotted against orders (multiples of running
speed). The advantage of this mode is that running speed
can drastically change, but the vibration amplitude and
phase components are always plotted in the same ordered
position. In this mode, a low pass filter tracks running
speed with cutoff frequency set by the menu selection of
maximum orders. This ordered data of phase and ampli-
tude in conjunction with the PRISM host software allows
for an ordered vector polar plot.

> To set Measurement Type:Orders fields:

• At the Measurement Type: field, select Or-
ders with the pointer bar and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Number of Orders,
Figure 2 - 9).

2 - 20 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Spectrum Setup/Measurement Type:Orders

23.pcx

Figure 2 - 9. The Number of Orders Field.

Measurement Type:Orders fields are:

Number of Orders - This function, used in conjunction

with a tachometer input, sets the number of orders to
full scale on the horizontal display.

• Enter any number which, when multiplied by

running frequency, is less than 20,000 Hz and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Number of Aver-
ages).

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 21
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Display Setup

¾ Refer to pages 2 - 15 through 2 - 19 for

descriptions of Spectrum Setup/Meas-
urement Type:Orders fields:
Number of Averages Average Overlap
Average Type Window
Average Mode

Display Setup
> To access the Display Setup screen:
• At the Dynamic menu, press 4 or move the
pointer bar to 4:Display Setup and press < EN-
TER> . The Display Setup screen displays
(Figure 2 - 10).
36.pcx

Figure 2 - 10.
The Display Setup Menu.

2 - 22 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Display Setup

Display Setup fields are:

Trace - The dual screen option is advantageous whenever

the frequency and time domain both contain valuable
information and need to be viewed simultaneously
(Figure 2 - 11). Press MENU to view the choices.
371.pcx

Figure 2 - 11. A Dual Screen Display.

¾ When you SAVE a dual trace, more mem-

ory is used because you are saving dual
screens.

• Select your choice of Trace with the pointer bar

and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen.

¾ Depending on your selection of Trace,

continue with the section headed Display
Setup/Trace: Single or with the section
headed Display Setup/Trace:Dual.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 23
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Display Setup/Trace: Single

Display Setup/Trace: Single

Trace:Single fields are:

Screen 1 - The primary display, normally a magnitude

spectrum, should be selected for screen 1. Press
MENU to view the choices.

• Select Magnitude (spectrum), Time (time do-

main waveform), or Phase (spectrum) with the
pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Phase Type).

Phase Type - (User Mode:Analysis only) These two

choices are provided to enable selecting a display con-
forming to the user’s standard convention. Press
MENU to view the choices.

• Select Phase Type with the pointer bar and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Cursor Type).

Cursor Type - The full width cross is easiest to observe

and recommended for use. Press MENU to view the
choices.

• Select Cursor Type with the pointer bar and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (X Axis Label).

X Axis Label - Allows time data to be displayed in de-

grees as a multiple of the machine rotation (for exam-
ple: 360, 720 degrees) or in milliseconds.

2 - 24 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Display Setup/Trace: Dual

To display in degrees, Spectrum Setup/Frequency

Type must be set to Orders, and Display
Setup/Screen 1 or 2 must be set to Time. Press
MENU to view the choices.

• Select Degrees or MSec with the pointer bar

and press < ENTER> .
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamic
setup selection menu.

Display Setup/Trace: Dual

41.pcx

Figure 2 - 12.
The Display Setup Menu.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 25
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Trigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

Trace:Dual fields are:

Screen 1 - The upper display in Trace:Dual. The pri-

mary display, normally a magnitude spectrum, should
be selected for screen 1.

• Select Magnitude (spectrum), Time (time do-

main waveform), or Phase (spectrum) with the
pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Screen 2).

Screen 2 - The lower display in Trace:Dual. Press

MENU to view the choices.

¾ See above information on selecting Mag-

nitude, Time, or Phase.

¾ Refer to page 2 - 24 for description of Dis-

play Setup/Trace:Dual fields:
Phase Type Cursor Type
X Axis Label

Trigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

Trigger type and trigger conditioning for shaft speed and
phase measurements are set from this menu (Figure 2 -
13).

> To access the Trigger Setup screen:

• At the Dynamic menu, press 5 or move the
pointer bar to 5:Trigger Setup and press < EN-
TER> (Figure 2 - 13).

2 - 26 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Trigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

49.pcx

Figure 2 - 13. The Trigger Setup Menu.

Trigger Setup fields are:

Trigger Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

• With the pointer bar, select between Free Run

for inputs without a phase reference and Trig-
ger when a separate synchronous reference
pulse is available and to be used.
• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Trigger
Source).

Trigger Source - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select External when a phase reference trigger

is available and connected to the input of the

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 27
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Trigger Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

Microlog. Input causes the Microlog to trigger

from an input signal.

¾ Triggering from the input signal is typi-

cally used to stabilize the time domain dis-
play. It cannot be used for phase trending
or balancing.

• Select your choice of Trigger Source with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Input Trigger Slope).

Input Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select plus or minus with the pointer bar to de-

termine whether the trigger occurs on a rising
or descending signal.
• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Input Trigger
Level).

Input Trigger Level - Enter percent of full scale ampli-

tude range (%FS) to eliminate noise which may cause
false triggering. The input trigger level will typically
have to be set above zero to prevent false triggering
whenever an internal trigger is selected.

¾ This field is not active when Trigger

Source:External has been selected.

• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances

to the next field on the screen (Trigger Delay).

Trigger Delay - Trigger delay is used to view pre-trigger

or post-trigger information. For the bump test, a

2 - 28 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Marker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

negative delay is used to have zero data prior to the

bump excitation to minimize leakage errors. The de-
lay is entered as a negative number of milliseconds
(for example: —50ms)

• Enter number of milliseconds to offset the refer-

ence pulse. The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Pulses/Rev).

¾ Enter a positive number for trigger delay,

a negative number for a pre-trigger pulse.

Pulses/Rev - Enter number of tachometer or reference

pulses per main shaft revolution (maximum eight dig-
its including the decimal point). Defaults to 1 in
User Mode:Normal (see Utilities/Data Collection).
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Length/Rev).

Length/Rev - This function has not yet been implemented.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamic

setup selection menu.

Marker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

Establishes the type and characteristics of reference mark-
ers which may be toggled on and off from the keypad.

> To access the Marker Setup screen:

• At the Dynamic menu, press 6 or move the
pointer bar to 6:Marker Setup (Figure 2 - 14)
and press < ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 29
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Marker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

screen78.pcx

Figure 2 - 14.
The Marker Setup Menu Options.

Marker Setup fields are:

Marker Type - Press MENU to view choices.

Harmonic - Sets a series of markers at integer multi-
ples of the cursor position, or at the reference fre-
quency.
Relative - Measures frequency from a marker posi-
tion to the location of the cursor. Used to measure
the difference between two frequencies and/or two
amplitudes.
Sideband - Sets a series of equally spaced markers
on either side of the cursor frequency, or on either
side of the reference frequency.

¾ With MKRS OFF, F2 causes the cursor

to jump to the next highest peak in the vi-

2 - 30 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Marker Setup (User Mode:Analysis only)

cinity of the cursor. With MKRS ON,

F2 causes the cursor to jump to the next
marker.

• Select your choice of Marker Type with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Marker Mode).

Marker Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

In Marker Mode:Cursor Lock, the marker funda-
mental is determined by setting the cursor on the de-
sired peak and by turning on the markers.
In Marker Type:Relative, the cursor is then released
so you can read its position of amplitude, frequency,
or order relative to the fundamental.
In Marker Mode:Fixed Freq, the marker fundamen-
tal is set to the reference frequency entered in the
next field, Reference Freq.

• Select your choice of Marker Mode with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Reference Freq).

Reference Frequency - Enter the marker reference fre-

quency. The pointer bar advances to the next field on
the screen (Sideband Freq).

¾ This field is active only if you selected

Marker Mode:Fixed Freq.

Sideband Frequency - Enter the spacing of sideband

markers around the reference frequency and press
< ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 31
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Collecting NonRoute Dynamic Data

¾ This field is active only if you selected

Marker Mode:Fixed Freq.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Dynamic

setup selection menu.

Collecting NonRoute Dynamic Data

Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe and
record dynamic POINT data. On the Dynamic menu se-
lect 1:Take Data.

¾ The alarm levels for alarm1 and alarm2 in

NonRoute and Analyzer modes are set in-
ternally by the Microlog to 40% and 70%
of full scale.
The Microlog does not allow dynamic data to be collected
during overload state. The Microlog reports input signals
too large for the display with an OVERLOADED SIGNAL
banner on the screen, and with the overload indicator
(OV) in the center of the status line (top line) of the dis-
play. If a signal overload is indicated, increase the full
scale amplitude range to prevent amplitude errors. During
data collection you may increase or decrease the full scale
amplitude range in the Dynamic Data Point or FFT dis-
plays with the up and down arrow keys.
Depending on how you set Average Mode in Spectrum
Setup, the FFT may continue to average beyond the cho-
sen number of averages (Average Mode:Continuous), it
may stop averaging and freeze the display (Average
Mode:Finite), or it may repeat the entire averaging proc-
ess to the chosen number of averages (Average Mode:Re-
peat).
With this flexibility, the Microlog may be used to view an
instantaneous time domain waveform or FFT in real time;

2 - 32 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Using the Function Keys

view an averaged spectrum as it is collected; collect, aver-

age, and freeze a spectrum; or view a repeated spectrum.
The controllable cursor is moved right and left with the
right and left arrow keys to display frequency, magnitude,
phase, and order of any spectral component. Markers, de-
fined on the Marker Setup menu, may be turned on and
off with the MKRS ON/OFF function key.

Using the Function Keys

The dedicated function keys are active and may be used
when desired. Each function key is listed below with a de-
scription of its action. The name of each key is followed
by a letter in parentheses. When a function key function
is activated, this letter displays to the right of center of the
screen’s status line (top line).

FREEZE ON/OFF (F) - Toggles the FFT between active

(dynamic) and hold modes. FREEZE may be used
for detailed analysis of a dynamic spectrum. Press-
ing the FREEZE key a second time restarts the live
FFT. FREEZE is marked by the letter F above the
FFT display.

MKRS ON/OFF (M) - Toggles the markers on and off.

Harmonic markers are used to rapidly locate integral
orders in relation to their fundamental (1X).
Sideband markers allow you to determine modula-
tion frequency about a vibration peak. Sideband
markers are useful, for example, in locating a dam-
aged tooth in a gearbox.
Relative markers are useful in the time domain for re-
lating time intervals between events.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 33
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Using the Function Keys

¾ The F2 function key is an important aid

in using markers. When markers are
OFF, it advances the cursor to the highest
peak in the vicinity of the cursor. When
markers are ON, it advances the cursor to
the next marker. When Marker
Type:Sideband is active, the F2 key ad-
vances the cursor to the next sideband
marker so amplitude and frequency read-
ings relative to the reference frequency
can be read. When Marker Type:Rela-
tive is active, pressing the F2 key returns
the cursor to the reference frequency.

Marker Mode:Cursor Lock

When Marker Mode:Cursor Lock is active, the Marker
Type functions are:
Marker Type:Harmonic - In this function, a series
of small square (box) markers are displayed at each
integral multiple of the cursor position: 2, 3, 4, etc.

> To use the Harmonic function:

• Place the cursor at the frequency to be ana-
lyzed.
• Press the MKRS ON/OFF key to toggle the
function ON.
• Press the right arrow and left arrow keys to
move the cursor.

¾ You can press the right arrow or left ar-

row key several times before the cursor
moves, but each time an arrow key is
pressed some markers will move. This
special use of the arrow keys, called mi-

2 - 34 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Using the Function Keys

cro-motion, enables you to exactly align

the markers on the peaks.
SHIFT/right arrow or SHIFT/left arrow causes the
cursor and its related markers to move right or left in
a one FFT bin sequence. This saves you turning
markers off, moving the cursor, and turning the mark-
ers back on when you are checking more than one set
of harmonics.

¾ SHIFT is locked ON when the symbol

displays in the middle of the top line of
your screen.
Marker Type:Sideband - This function helps you
see sidebands around a central frequency.

> To use the Sideband function:

• Place the cursor at the frequency around which
sidebands are to be observed.
• Press MKRS ON/OFF to toggle the markers
on.
• Press the right arrow or left arrow keys until
the sideband array “ boxes” are aligned on the
peaks observed in the display.

¾ The entire sideband array may be moved

left or right with the left arrow or right
arrow keys after pressing the SHIFT key.
Toggle the SHIFT lock off if you want to
use other keys in lower case.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 35
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Using the Function Keys

Marker Type:Relative - This function helps you

measure the distance between two peaks.

> To use the Relative function:

• Place the cursor at the desired beginning point
for the measurement.
• Press the MKRS ON/OFF key to toggle the
markers ON.
• Press the right arrow or left arrow keys to
place the cursor at the desired end point for the
measurement.
The difference between the marker and cursor dis-
plays numerically directly above the graphic display.

Marker Mode:Fixed Freq

When Marker Mode:Fixed Freq is active, the Marker
Type functions are:

Marker Type:Harmonic - The marker displays on the ref-

erence frequency and on all integral harmonics. The
cursor is free to move to any other spectral compo-
nent so amplitude and frequency can be read.

Marker Type:Sideband - The main marker appears at the

frequency you specified and five sideband markers
are spaced at the sideband frequency you specified.
The cursor is free to move to any spectral component.

Marker Type:Relative - The main marker appears at the

reference frequency. The cursor is free to move to
any other spectral component so relative amplitude
and frequency can be read.

2 - 36 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Using the Function Keys

DISPLY EXPAND (D) - This function graphically ex-

pands the contents of a time or frequency domain dis-
play vertically and/or horizontally to use the full
dynamic range of the Microlog. It reveals charac-
teristics which may be hidden by the display mode or
by the resolution without changing data collection pa-
rameters. To activate the DISPLY EXPAND func-
tion, press its key on the keypad. The actual
expansion is accomplished by arrow keys.

¾ In a split screen display, DISPLY EX-

PAND is active on the screen occupied by
the cursor. SHIFT CURSOR and DIS-
PLY EXPAND can be used to selectively
expand one of the two screens displayed.

SAVE

> To assign an ID to a dynamic data display and store the

data:
• Press the SAVE key, a 20-character window dis-
plays.
• Enter the ID or IDs in the window.
• When the IDs have been specified, press
< ENTER> to store the display.

ZOOM IN (Z): Zooms in on the FFT spectrum in the fre-

quency domain (time domain displays are not affected
by ZOOM) to provide more frequency resolution be-
tween lines. The Microlog takes the frequency at the
cursor position and progressively divides the fre-
quency range by half each time you press the ZOOM
IN key. The lines resolution across the zoomed fre-
quency range remains approximately constant.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 37
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Using the Function Keys

Example: Suppose the current frequency range is

from 0 to 60000 CPM with 400 lines resolution and
the cursor is at 12000 CPM.
When you press ZOOM IN, the new frequency range
is 30000 CPM with 400 lines resolution and the cur-
sor will still be at 12000 CPM.
Press ZOOM IN again to produce a new frequency
range of 15000 CPM with the cursor still at 12000
CPM.

¾ Although the Microlog displays only a

portion of the increased resolution spec-
trum in ZOOM, the full frequency range
is available at the same resolution in the
segment being displayed and can be exam-
ined (panned) by moving the cursor be-
yond the end of the visible frequency
range with the left arrow or right arrow
keys. Panning moves the viewing window
to the right or left of the frequency range.

ZOOM OUT: Reverses ZOOM IN.

RESET MEASMT - Resets the FFT average to zero and

restarts the averaging. This is especially useful if
something happens during the FFT averaging process
to invalidate the measurement, such as losing contact
with the probe. You may also reset when you wish to
repeat a measurement for any reason.

1XRPM - Sets the frequency at the cursor position to the

machine running speed, and uses the value as the in-
dex for the order display.

2 - 38 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Using the Function Keys

> To use the 1XRPM function:

• Move the spectrum cursor to the spectral compo-
nent (peak) you have identified as running fre-
quency.
• Press the 1XRPM key. The order displayed on
a line above the FFT reads 1.0 or close to 1.0.
As the cursor is moved across the spectrum, the or-
der displayed indicates the order value relative to the
running frequency set with 1XRPM.

¾ The Microlog interpolates between adja-

cent spectral lines to arrive at an accurate
value of running frequency. Since orders
are calculated to the center of spectral
lines, they may be displayed as 1.01,
2.05, etc.

F1/F2 -
F1 - toggles between displaying the value at the cur-
sor and displaying the overall value.
F2 -
MKRS OFF - causes the cursor to jump
to the highest peak in the vicinity of the
cursor.
MKRS ON - causes the cursor to jump to
the next marker.

SHIFT CURSOR - When the dual screen option is cho-

sen in the Trace field (in Display Setup), this key
toggles the cursor between the two screens.

¾ In a dual screen display, Function Keys

act on the screen with the cursor.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 39
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Process Measurements

LIN/LOG (L) - Toggles the spectrum display between lin-

ear and logarithmic amplitude scales. LOG enables
viewing very low level spectral components on the
display. The normal or default condition is set to
LIN.

¾ In Log mode, the amplitude of the cursor

displayed above the graph reads in linear
amplitude (such as Gs or IPS) although
the vertical axis of the graph is scaled in
dB.

PGUP - During data collection, press PGUP to double

the maximum frequency.

PGDN - During data collection, press PGDN to cut the

maximum frequency in half.

Process Measurements
> To set up for taking process measurements:
• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer
bar to 2:NonRoute and press < ENTER> .
The screen of Figure 2 - 3 displays.
• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:Process
and press < ENTER> . The screen of Figure 2
- 15 displays.

2 - 40 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Process Measurements

56.pcx

Figure 2 - 15. The Process Menu.

• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:Input

Setup and press < ENTER> . The screen of
Figure 2 - 16 displays.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 41
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Process Measurements

57.pcx

Figure 2 - 16. The Process Input Screen.

Process Input screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identify

the equipment and the exact location
where a measurement is to be recorded.

DESC - Enter up to 32 characters and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field on the screen (Full Scale).

Full Scale - Enter the highest anticipated value of the

measurement and press < ENTER> . The pointer
bar advances to the next field on the screen (Engi-
neering Units for Full Scale).

2 - 42 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Collecting NonRoute Process Data

• Enter your choice of Engineering Units and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Input Sens).

Input Sens(itivity) - Enter millivolts (mv) per engineering

unit (EU) for inputs from a directly connected pickup
such as an infrared temperature sensor. Press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field on the screen (Input Offset).

¾ Entering a zero (0) for Input Sens indi-

cates the input is to be a manual entry.

Input Offset - Required when measuring a value from a 4-

20 mA current loop.

• Enter a value in millivolts to offset the zero

point of the measurement and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
top of the menu.
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Process
menu.

Collecting NonRoute Process Data

Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe and
record process POINT data. Process data can be input
with any DC device, such as a temperature probe con-
nected to your Microlog, or it can be manually entered
from an observed reading.

> To access the Take Data screen:

• On the Process menu, select 1:Take Data. The
screen of Figure 2 - 17 displays.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 43
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Collecting NonRoute Process Data

60.pcx

Figure 2 - 17.
The Process Data Collection Screen.

• Press < ENTER> to start recording the read-

ing (if you are connected to a dc device) or to
manually enter data (if you are observing it).
• Press < ENTER> to save the current measure-
ment.

> To access the Options menu:

• Press MENU to display the Options menu. If
you are connected to a DC device, the Options
menu displays.

Options are:
1:Make Reading 2:Manual Read
3:Coded Notes 4:User Note

2 - 44 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
HFD Measurements

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 10 and 1 - 11 for de-

scription of the above Options Menu
choices.

HFD Measurements
> To set up for taking HFD measurements:
• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer
bar to 2:NonRoute and press < ENTER> .
The screen of Figure 2 - 3 displays.
• Press 3 or move the pointer bar to 3:HFD and
press < ENTER> . A screen similar to Figure
2 - 15 displays.
• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:Input
Setup and press < ENTER> . The screen of
Figure 2 - 18 displays.
scns3-34.pcx

Figure 2 - 18.
The HFD Input Menu.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 45
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Collecting NonRoute HFD Data

HFD Input Setup fields are:

¾ Refer to page 2 - 42 for descriptions of

the ID and DESC fields.

Full Scale - Enter the highest anticipated value of the

measurement in Gs and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the screen
(Input Sens).

Input Sens(itivity) - Enter millivolts (mv) per engineering

unit (EU) sensitivity of the accelerometer and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field on the screen (Detection).

¾ Entering a zero (0) for Input Sens indi-

cates the input is to be a manual entry.

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Use the arrow keys to select Peak or RMS and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the top of the menu.
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the HFD menu.

Collecting NonRoute HFD Data

High Frequency Detection (HFD) measurements, which
provides a measure of early warning of bearing failure.
Measuring in the 5 kHz to 60 kHz range, HFD detects the
metal-to-metal contact which occurs when lubrication is
not sufficient or not able to do its job. Use a standard ac-
celerometer to collect HFD data.
Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe and
record HFD data.

2 - 46 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Running Speed Measurements

> To observe and record HFD data:

• On the HFD menu, select 1:Take Data. A
screen similar to Figure 2 - 17 displays.
• Press < ENTER> to start recording the read-
ing or to manually enter data (if you are observ-
ing it).
• Press < ENTER> to save the current measure-
ment. Press MENU to display the Options
menu. If you are recording data manually, the
Options menu displays.
Options are:

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 10 and 1 - 11 for de-

scriptions of Options menu choices:
1:Make Reading 2:Manual Read
3:Coded Notes 4:User Note

4:Make Reading - This selection re-takes the reading and

overwrites the previous reading.

Running Speed Measurements

> To measure the 1XRPM of a machine:
• At the Main menu, press 2 or move the pointer
bar to 2:NonRoute and press < ENTER> .
The screen of Figure 2 - 3 displays.
• Press 4 or move the pointer bar to 4:Running
Speed and press < ENTER> . A screen simi-
lar to Figure 2 - 15 displays.
• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:Input
Setup and press < ENTER> . The screen of
Figure 2 - 19 displays.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 47
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Running Speed Measurements

67.pcx

Figure 2 - 19.
The Speed Input Screen.

Input Setup fields are:

¾ Refer to page 2 - 42 for descriptions of

the ID, DESC, and Full Scale fields.

Pulses/Rev - Enter number of tachometer pulses per revo-

lution and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next choice on the menu (Length/Rev).

¾ The Microlog divides the tachometer

pulse rate by pulses/rev so the measure-
ment is equal to the running speed of the
machine (1XRPM).

Length/Rev - This function has not yet been implemented.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Running
Speed menu.

2 - 48 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The NonRoute Menu
Collecting NonRoute Running Speed Data

• Press < ESCAPE> once more to return to the

NonRoute menu.

Collecting NonRoute Running Speed Data

To collect running speed data, you must have a tachometer
connected to your Microlog for external trigger input.
Running speed may be collected with a direct tachometer
input or by observing a reading and entering the data
manually.
Once all setup steps are completed, you may observe and
record running speed.

> To observe and record running speed data:

• On the Running Speed menu, press 1 or move
the pointer bar to 1:Take Data and press
< ENTER> . A screen similar to Figure 2 -
17 displays.
• Press < ENTER> to start recording the read-
ing.

¾ If a tach input is not present, data is not

collected and the Microlog’s screen dis-
plays the message NO TACH.

> To collect data manually:

• Press MENU to display options.

CMVA60 Microlog 2 - 49
User Manual
The NonRoute Menu
Collecting NonRoute Running Speed Data

Options are:

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 10 and 1 - 11 for de-

scriptions of Options menu choices:
1:Make Reading 2:Manual Read
3:Coded Notes 4:User Note.
• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Manual
Read and press < ENTER> .
• Press < ENTER> to start recording the read-
ing.
• Press < ENTER> to save the current speed.

2 - 50 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 3/6/92 10:40 S.G.

3
The Transfer Menu

There are two ways to transfer data between the PRISM

host software on your host computer and your CMVA60
Microlog data collector:
• Via a direct, hard-wired connection between the
Microlog and host computer.
• Via modems between the Microlog and an at-
tended host computer.

Setting the Communication Mode Parameters

> To set up the Communication mode parameters:
• Set the PRISM host software communication
mode parameters through the PRISM host soft-
ware Control Panel screen.

¾ Refer to your PRISM host software’s User

Manual for detailed instructions.

• Connect your Microlog to its host computer

through a modem, or directly connected as illus-
trated in Figure 3 - 1.
• Turn on the Microlog.
• Follow the setup instructions in the section
headed Communications in Chapter 8, Utili-
ties.

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 1
User Manual
The Transfer Menu
Data Transfer

dani.sld

support module

host
computer Microlog
data collector

Figure 3 - 1. The Microlog/PRISM System.

¾ Communication parameters must be the

same in both the Microlog and host com-
puter.

Data Transfer
Transfer data using one of the following combinations set
up in the Microlog:

Modem Mode:None - For a direct, hard-wired connec-

tion between the Microlog and host computer.

Modem Mode:Originate - Works in a like manner to the

hard-wired situation; however, the Microlog can be
operating at a distance from the host computer over
telephone lines. The Microlog “ dials” the call and
the PRISM host software automatically answers. The
host computer must be attended by an operator.

3 - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Transfer Menu
Data Transfer - Download

Modem Mode:Auto Answer - To make the connection,

the PRISM host software originates the call and the
Microlog automatically answers.

Data Transfer - Download

Modem Mode:None
This mode is used with your PRISM host software for a di-
rect, hard-wired connection between the Microlog and
host computer.

> To download directly from the host computer to the

Microlog:
• From the Main menu, press 3 or move the
pointer bar to 3:Transfer and press < EN-
TER> . The Transfer menu screen (Figure 3 -
2) appears and the Microlog is ready to commu-
nicate with its host.
ch8-02.pcx

Figure 3 - 2. The Microlog Transfer Screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 3
User Manual
The Transfer Menu
Data Transfer - Download

¾ If the host cannot establish communica-

tions, verify that communications parame-
ters are identical for both host and the
Microlog. Refer to the section headed
Communications in Chapter 8, Utilities
and your PRISM host software’s User
Manual for details.
You may verify Communications settings in the Microlog
by pressing MENU at the screen of Figure 3 - 2. A trans-
fer communications screen displays (Figure 3 - 3). See
the Communications section in Chapter 8, Utilities, for
using this screen.
1002.pcx

Figure 3 - 3.
The Microlog Communications Screen.

As data transfer proceeds, the status on the Transfer

screen changes in response to information transferred
to/from the host. The number of SETs and POINTs trans-

3 - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Transfer Menu
Data Transfer - Download

ferred are reported on the Microlog screen along with the

number of messages, overalls, and spectra (Figure 3 - 4).
1003.pcx

Figure 3 - 4. The Transfer Screen Report.

The Microlog stores the downloaded POINTs and SETs

for data collection. Figure 3 - 5 shows a ROUTE display
on the Microlog screen for the downloaded SETs and
POINTs.

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 5
User Manual
The Transfer Menu
Data Transfer - Download

601.pcx

Figure 3 - 5. The Downloaded SETs and POINTs.

Modem Mode:Originate
This procedure works in a like manner to the hard-wired
setup; however, the Microlog can be operating at a dis-
tance from the host computer over telephone lines.
If Microlog/Transfer is selected in the PRISM host soft-
ware, with Modem Mode:Auto Answer selected in the
PRISM host software’s Control Panel (that is, answer
mode via modem), a Microlog operator may set the
Microlog to Modem Mode:Originate (that is, “ dial-up”
mode via modem) and access Transfer on the Microlog
main menu. The Microlog dials the modem phone num-
ber. Connection is made, and the operator at the host com-
puter may upload or download as if in hard-wired mode.

3 - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Transfer Menu
Data Transfer - Upload

Modem Mode:Auto Answer

This procedure works in a like manner to the hard-wired
situation; however, the Microlog can be operating at a dis-
tance from the host computer over telephone lines.
If Microlog/Transfer is selected in the PRISM host soft-
ware on the host computer with Modem Mode:Originate
selected in the PRISM host software’s Control Panel (that
is, “ dial-up” mode via modem), the Microlog operator
must set the Microlog to Modem Mode:Auto Answer
(that is, answer mode via modem) and access Transfer in
the Microlog main menu. The PRISM host software dials
the modem phone number. Connection is made, and the
operator at the host computer may upload or download as
if in hard-wired mode.

Data Transfer - Upload

> To upload from the Microlog to the host computer:
• From the Microlog’s Main menu, press 3 or
move the pointer bar to 3:Transfer and press
< ENTER> . The Transfer menu (Figure 3 -
6) appears and the Microlog is ready to commu-
nicate with its host.

CMVA60 Microlog 3 - 7
User Manual
The Transfer Menu
Data Transfer - Upload

ch8-02.pcx

Figure 3 - 6. The Microlog Transfer Screen.

¾ If the host cannot establish communica-

tions, verify that communications parame-
ters are identical in the host and the
Microlog. Refer to the section headed
Communications in Chapter 8, Utilities
and your PRISM host software’s User
Manual for details.
If you select The Entire SKF Microlog, all POINTs in
the Microlog uploads their data to the PRISM host soft-
ware in the host computer. If you select From the Desig-
nated SET, the Microlog uploads only data for those
POINTs in the one SET highlighted by the upper right-
hand window’s pointer bar.

3 - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 3-4-92 6:20 S.G.

4
The Applications Menu

Applications menu options provide easy set up and data

collection screens for monitoring and adjusting specific
machinery applications. Applications menu options are:
Balancing (Basic)
Balancing (Advanced)
Tracking Filter
Cyclic Analysis
Current Analysis
Bump Test
Run Up/Coast Down
Configuration Wizard

> To access Applications menu options:

• At the Main menu, press 4, or move the pointer
bar to 4:Applications and press < ENTER> .
The Applications menu displays (Figure 4 - 1).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 1
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

app-1.pcx

Figure 4 - 1. The Applications Menu.

Balancing (Basic)
The basic balancing wizard is designed as a learning aid to
help guide the first time user through basic balancing se-
quences.

> To access the Balancing (Basic) menu options:

• From the Applications menu, press 1 or move
the pointer bar to 1:Balancing (Basic) and
press < ENTER> . The Balancing (Basic)
menu displays (Figure 4 - 2).

4 - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bg-balmn.w mf

Figure 4 - 2. The Balancing (Basic) Menu.

¾ It is recommended to always start with the

first selection, Select Balance Job.
• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Select Bal-
ance Job (if it is not already there) and press
< ENTER> . A list box containing NEW
BALANCE JOB (always the first item on the
list) and any previously saved jobs displays (Fig-
ure 4 - 3). If a job already exists in RAM, the
user is prompted to either exit, select a new job
(via the list box), or go with the current job in
RAM (re-balance).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 3
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

baljob.w mf

Figure 4 - 3. The Balance Jobs List.

• Select NEW BALANCE JOB, then press

< ENTER> , the Balance Setup screen dis-
plays (Figure 4 - 4).

¾ If a previously saved job is selected, the

application guides the user to a re-balanc-
ing operation consisting of trim run(s).

4 - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bb-2.pcx

Figure 4 - 4. The Balance Setup Screen.

Balance Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 16 characters to uniquely identify this job

and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to
the next field on the screen (Type).

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity),

displacement, or volts), which depends upon the type
of seismic sensor used (accelerometer, velocity
pickup, or proximity probe), is required to establish
integration requirements for the FFT calculation.
Press MENU to view the choices.

¾ Although provided as options, SEE and

Enveloping are not applicable to balanc-
ing operations as they are non-synchro-
nous.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 5
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

• Select your choice for Type of measurement

with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Input).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) per

Engineering Unit (EU) and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the screen
(Units for Weights).

Units for Weights - Press MENU to view choices.

• Select from the three choices (OZ, LBS,
GRMS)and press < ENTER> .
• Press < ESCAPE> . The Reference Run
Setup screen displays (Figure 4 - 5).
bb-4.pcx

Figure 4 - 5. The Reference Run Setup Screen.

• Carefully read the information displayed on the

Reference Run Setup screen and press < EN-
TER> to continue. The Reference Run Data

4 - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

collection screen displays and data collection be-

gins. (Figure 4 - 6).
d25.pcx

Figure 4 - 6.
The Reference Run Data Collection Screen.

• When data collection is complete, press < EN-

TER> to save the collected data. The Trial
Weight Estimate screen displays (Figure 4 - 7).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 7
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bb-6.pcx

Figure 4 - 7.
The Trial Weight Estimate Screen.

Read the Trial Weight Estimate screen carefully. This

screen describes trail weight procedures and criteria.
• Press < ENTER> , the Trial Weight Setup
screen displays (Figure 4 - 8).

4 - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bb-7.pcx

Figure 4 - 8. The Trial Weight Setup Screen.

Trial Weight Setup fields are:

Plane 1/Weight - Enter the size of weight (magnitude)

computed by the Microlog in its Estimate Trial
Weight Calculation (or chosen by you) and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field (Plane 1/Angle).
Plane 1/Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight will
be attached and press < ENTER> .
• Press < ESCAPE> to continue, the Installing
Trial Weights screen displays (Figure 4 - 9).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 9
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bb-8.pcx

Figure 4 - 9.
The Installing Trial Weights Screen.

Read the Installing Trial Weights screen and press < EN-
TER> to continue with Trial Run data collection. The
Trial Weights data collection screen displays (same as Fig-
ure 4 - 6).
• Press < ENTER> to save data and the Correc-
tion Weight screen displays (Figure 4 - 10).

4 - 10 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bb-10.pcx

Figure 4 - 10. The Correction Weights Screen.

• Read the displayed information carefully. Press

< ENTER> , the Correction Weight Place-
ment screen displays (Figure 4 - 11).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 11
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bb-11.pcx

Figure 4 - 11.
The Correction Weight Placement Screen.

Based on data collected in the reference run(s) and trial

run(s), suggested initial correction weights and placement
angles are computed and displayed. These are the initial
values used to correct the imbalance.

¾ Sometimes, a weight cannot conveniently

be placed at the angle recommended by
balancing computations. If this is the
case, press F1 to display the Splitting
One Weight Into Two Setup screen and
the Microlog performs the necessary cal-
culations.
• Press < ENTER> to continue, the Installing
Trim Weights screen displays (Figure 4 - 12).

4 - 12 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

bb-12.pcx

Figure 4 - 12.
The Installing Trim Weights Screen.

• Press < ENTER> to begin trim run data col-

lection. The Trim Run data collection screen
displays (same as Figure 4 - 6).
• When data collection is complete, press < EN-
TER> to save the data and the Trim Run com-
pleted screen displays (Figure 4 - 13).
bb-14.pcx

Figure 4 - 13. The Trim Run Complete Screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 13
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

¾ If further trimming is required, use the

Trim Weight(s) information displayed
and press < ENTER> to retrim.

¾ If a weight cannot conveniently be placed

at the angle recommended, press F1 to
split the weight.
• If Trim Run data is acceptable, press < ES-
CAPE> to return to the Balancing (Basic)
menu.
• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 3 or
move the pointer bar to 3:Save Balance Job and
press < ENTER> to save the job.

> To view a completed balance job’s data:

• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 2 or
move the pointer bar to 2:View Run Data and
press < ENTER> . The View Run Data screen
displays (Figure 4 - 14).

4 - 14 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Basic)

v-r-d.w mf

Figure 4 - 14. The View Run Data Screen.

¾ All data displayed is for the currently

loaded job, whether it is the completion
of a new balance job, or a previously
saved job that has just been loaded.
The Reference Run section displays speed, magnitude and
phase data taken during the reference run.
In the Trial Run section, the speed, magnitude and phase
data are the result of using trial weights (not shown). The
weight and angle component of the Trial Run is the initial
or correction weight data resulting from the trial run.
In the Trim Run section, the speed, magnitude and phase
data is the result of applying the weight and angle compo-
nents in the trim run.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 15
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Basic Balancing Tips

> To save a balance job:

• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 3 or
move the pointer bar to 3:Save Balance Job and
press < ENTER> . The current balancing job
is saved to permanent memory.

> To print a balance job report:

• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 4 or
move the pointer bar to 4:Report and press
< ENTER> . The current balance job is
printed to the printer selected in the Reports
menu.

> To clear a balance job from temporary memory:

• From the Balancing (Basic) menu, press 5 or
move the pointer bar to 5:Clear Job and press
< ENTER> . The current balance job is
cleared from temporary memory (RAM).

Basic Balancing Tips

• The basic balancing setup limits the user to four
basic balancing configuration settings. This lim-
ited choice selection focuses on the basics and is
designed to prevent the beginning user from be-
ing confused or intimidated by menu selections.
• After running a trial run using a trial weight,
the CMVA60 automatically checks to see if the
30-30 rule was passed. If it did not pass, the
user has the option of re-trying the trial run
with a different trial weight/angle, exiting, or
continuing to the trim run operation. (30-30 rule
- trial weights applied to an estimated balance
plane position must produce at least a 30%
change in amplitude or 30o change in phase
from the initial data.)

4 - 16 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Advanced)

• More than one trim run can be executed to fur-

ther "fine-tune" the trim adjustment. Word of
caution: there is a limit as to how fine a tuning
can be conducted. There will be a point where
any further trim weights added will not improve
the balancing or can actually make it worse.
• After completing a balancing job and returning
to the Balancing(Basic) menu, the job should
be saved. By saving a job, it can be retrieved at
a later time for re-balancing or reporting.
• If the CMVA60 powers down in the middle of a
balancing job, perform the following sequence
to return to where you left off:
1. Power up the unit.
2. Select Balancing (Basic).
3. Select Select Balance Job.
4. When prompted with "A previous job has
been detected in RAM" message, press < EN-
TER> to return to the state you had left off.

Balancing (Advanced)
Overview
Following is an overview of steps performed in a “ typical”
balancing procedure.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 17
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balancing (Advanced)

¾ If rotor length to diameter ratio is less

than .5 (L/D < .5), then single plane bal-
ancing will probably reduce imbalance to
acceptable levels. Overhung rotors are
also a special case in which single plane
methods are used.
Refer to the Additional Balancing Notes section at the
end of this Balancing (Advanced) section for a more de-
tailed discussion of setup procedures and application guide-
lines.

Single Plane Balancing

The balancing procedure in general is as follows:
Trigger
Machine balancing requires a shaft 1X signal either
to the external trigger BNC input or to the phase
adapter connector. The trigger signal is normally ob-
tained from the ± TTL output of one of three triggers:
• converters
• light sensitive or laser beam
• reflective systems or the SKF StrobeLite
Balance Setup
Setup menu entries control all measurement parame-
ters required for the balancing sequence. There is no
need to escape from this menu to any other menu to
perform the measurement sequence setup.
Reference Run
At this point, the machine’s “ initial” measurement is
stored.
The Tracking screen displays the running speed,
which must be stable within 1 CPM to ensure good
phase data.

4 - 18 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balancing (Advanced)

Trial Run/Trial Weight Estimate and Setup

The Trial Weight Estimate is based on the criteria
that the trial run centrifugal force does not exceed
10% of the bearing shaft load. Trial weights are ap-
plied to an estimated balance plane position and must
produce at least a 30% change in amplitude or 30o
change in phase (30-30 rule) from the initial data.
Trial Run/Trial Weight/Trial Run 1
After trial weights have been installed, the machine is
run up to the same stable speed as with the initial
readings. Stable speeds are very important.
A warning displays if the 30-30 rule described above
is not met.
Trial Run/Correction Weights
After both the initial and trial runs are completed, in-
fluence coefficients are calculated, and are used to de-
termine the Initial Correction Weight locations.
Trial Run/Correction Weights/Split Options
Often, either the correction weight must be split to
conform to the balance weight hole pattern or other
weights in the balance holes must be combined.
These options are available in the Utility Functions
menu.
Trim Run/Trim Run
Once the trial weights have been removed (Weights
Left in Forever:No) and the initial weight installed,
trim run data is collected and stored.
Trim Run/Calculate Trim Weight
Influence coefficients that were calculated for the in-
itial correction weight are used again to obtain the
trim weight.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 19
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

Save Balance Job

If desired, the current balancing job may be saved to
permanent memory for later retrieval.
Report
A hard copy report of the balance data/Influence Co-
efficients is produced when the printer adapter inter-
faces the Microlog with either a laserjet or dot matrix
printer.

Two Plane Balancing

In two plane balancing, the measurement sequence
proceeds in the same order as single plane balancing,
except two trial weights and two trial runs are re-
quired to calculate the four influence coefficients
(only 1 coefficient exists for single plane). Since the
CMVA60 is a single channel instrument, the bearing
measurements of plane A and B are performed sepa-
rately.

Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

> To set up the Microlog’s Balancing (Advanced) options:
• From the Applications menu, press 2, or move
the pointer bar to 2:Balancing (Advanced) and
press < ENTER> . The Balancing (ad-
vanced) menu screen displays (Figure 4 - 15).

4 - 20 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

adv-bal1.pcx

Figure 4 - 15.
The Balancing (advanced) Menu.

• In the Balancing (advanced) menu screen,

press 1, or move the pointer bar to 1:Select Bal-
ance Job (if it is not already there) and press
< ENTER> . The Balance Jobs list screen
(Figure 4 - 16) displays from which you may
create a NEW BALANCE JOB or select an ex-
isting job.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 21
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

baljob.w mf

Figure 4 - 16. The Balance Jobs List Screen.

¾ If NEW BALANCE JOB is selected, the

Balance Setup screen automatically dis-
plays. If an existing job is selected, that
job is loaded into memory.
• Select NEW BALANCE JOB, the Balance
Setup screen displays (Figure 4 - 17).

¾ The Balance Setup menu can also be ac-

cessed by selecting 2:Balance Setup from
the Balancing (advanced) menu.

4 - 22 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

baladvstup.w mf

Figure 4-17. The Balance Setup Screen.

Balance Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 16 characters to uniquely identify this job

and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to
the next field (Type).

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity,

displacement, or volts), which depends upon the type
of seismic sensor used (accelerometer, velocity
pickup, or proximity probe), is required to establish
integration requirements for the FFT calculation.
Press MENU to view the choices.

¾ Although provided as options, SEE and

Enveloping are not applicable to balanc-
ing operations as they are non-synchro-
nous.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 23
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

• Select your choice for Type of measurement

with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Full Scale).

Full Scale - The units for this field were automatically de-
termined when you selected Type.

• Enter a numerical full scale value and press

< ENTER> . (Note that this value may also be
altered, when in the spectrum display, with the
up and down arrow keys.). The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Detec-
tion).

¾ If the number 0.0 is entered for the Full

Scale entry, autoranging and autoscaling
result.

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

The following table lists the Microlog’s method of sig-
nal detection and scaling for overall dynamic measure-
ments. Note that acceleration, velocity, and
displacement values obtained from an accelerometer
or velocity pickup are always scaled from RMS detec-
tion. This replicates the measurement method used
with most older instruments so newer Microlog re-
corded values remain equivalent.

4 - 24 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

DETECTION
INPUT OUTPUT Peak Pk to Pk RMS
Acceleration Acceleration Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Acceleration Velocity Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Acceleration Displacement Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Velocity Velocity Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Velocity Displacement Scaled from Scaled from True
RMS RMS RMS
Displacement Displacement True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
Voltage Voltage True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
SEE SEE True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
ENV/ACC ENV/ACC True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS
ENV/VEL ENV/VEL True True True
Peak Pk to Pk RMS

¾ Although provided as options, SEE and

Enveloping are not applicable to balanc-
ing operations as they are non-synchro-
nous.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 25
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS, or Pk

to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Input).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) per

Engineering Unit (EU) and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the screen
(Bandwidth).

Bandwidth - Press MENU to view the choices.

Narrow - 5x
Normal - 10x
Wide - 20x
The Bandwidth option sets the tracking filter to a cut-
off of 5, 10, or 20 orders, which translates to a 5%,
10%, or 20% filter bandwidth around the 1X. A nar-
row bandwidth can be used for trim balance when the
1X amplitude is low and embedded in noise.

• Select your choice of Bandwidth with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Average
Type).

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Average - The summation of the magnitude of each
spectral line is divided by the total number of aver-
ages (ensemble averaging). This is the most fre-
quently used method of averaging for routine data
collection and analysis.
Off - The same as setting the number of averages to
1; the data is scaled by the selected method of detec-
tion and will update at its maximum rate.

4 - 26 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

Sync Time -Averaging in the time domain. This

method of averaging requires a reference trigger.
When this method is selected, the spectrum produced
and displayed is the FFT of the averaged synchronous
time domain samples.
• Select one of the Average Type options with the
pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Number
of Averages).

Number of Averages - Enter number of averages to be in-

cluded in the measurement and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field (Trigger
Slope).

Trigger Slope - Select plus or minus with the pointer bar

to determine whether the trigger occurs on a rising or
descending signal.
• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (Planes).

Planes - Press MENU to view the choices.

1 - A “ one-plane” rotor.
2, separately - A “ two-plane” rotor. Two series of
measurements must be taken (one for each plane).

¾ With Displacement type selected, the

screen for 1 or 2 planes contains runout
entry fields for a second point (Point B).
• Select one of the Planes options with the
pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Units for
Weights).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 27
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

Units for Weights - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select from the three choices with the pointer
bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (Weights Left In For-
ever).

Weights Left In Forever - Press MENU to view the

choices.
Yes - All trial weights are permanently attached to the
rotor and never removed.
No - All trial weights are removed before attaching
the correct weight.
• Select one of the Weights Left In Forever
options with the pointer bar and press
< ENTER> .
If Planes:2, separately is selected, an additional field dis-
plays at the bottom of your screen and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (Static-Dynamic mode, Figure 4 -
18).

4 - 28 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

add-field.w mf

Figure 4 - 18.
The Static-Dynamic mode Field.

Static-Dynamic mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

Select Yes to automatically calculate and display the
static correction by combining the initial correction
weights. This mode also automatically calculates the
couple correction after the trim runs have been com-
pleted. The couple correction component is calcu-
lated by taking 1/2 the vector difference of plane one
and two corrections.
If Type:Displacement was selected, additional fields dis-
play at the bottom of your screen and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (Runout Mag/Point A, Figure 4 -
19).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 29
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Setting Balancing (Advanced) Options

dbch3-16.pcx

Figure 4 - 19. The Runout Magnitude Field.

Runout Mag (Point A) - Enter runout magnitude (see

Glossary) for Point A and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Runout
Phase/Point A).

¾ Runout magnitude and phase can be ob-

tained as “ slow roll” data with the
Microlog.

With the Microlog, take slow roll data at

a speed between 300 RPM and 500 RPM.
Take this data during “ coast down” after
the unit has reached full operating tem-
perature. This ensures that shaft expan-
sions do not corrupt the runout signature.
Since runout is a vector quantity, both am-
plitude and phase values should be en-

4 - 30 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Reference Run

tered. It is better to enter zeros for both,

than to enter only a magnitude.

Runout Phase (Point A) - Enter runout phase for point A

and press < ENTER> .

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced

(Planes:2, separately), the last two steps
should be repeated for point B.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Balancing

(advanced) menu.
This completes the Balance setup.

Reference Run
This data collection run is made with no weights on the ro-
tor. The data collected is reference data.

Reference Run - Point A - This data collection run is

made with no weights on the rotor. Vibration data is
collected at Point A.

Reference Run - Point B - This data collection run is

made with no weights on the rotor. Vibration data is
collected at Point B.

> To perform a reference run:

• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 3
or move the pointer bar to 3:Reference Run
and press < ENTER> . The Reference Run
data collection screen displays (Figure 4 - 20)
and the Microlog automatically takes the user
through a single (or dual) plane reference run.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 31
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trial Run

d25-2.w mf

Figure 4 - 20.
The Reference Run Data Collection Screen.

Trial Run
This data collection run is made with the trial weight en-
tered in the Trial Weight Setup menu.

> To set up and perform a trial run:

• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 4
or move the pointer bar to 4:Trial Run and
press < ENTER> . The Trial Run menu dis-
plays (Figure 4 - 21).

4 - 32 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Trial Run

t rlrun-mn.w mf

Figure 4 - 21. The Trial Run Menu.

Estimate Trial Weight Setup

> To access the Estimate Trial Weight setup options:
• From the Trial Run menu, press 1 or move the
pointer bar to 1:Estimate Trial Weight and
press < ENTER> The Setup screen displays
(Figure 4 - 22).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 33
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trial Run

dbch3-20.pcx

Figure 4 - 22. The Setup Fields.

Fields in the Setup menu are:

Rotor Weight - Enter total rotor weight and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field (Rotor Speed).

¾ You select speed (Hz or CPM) and engi-

neering units (English or Metric) from
the Microlog’s Utilities/Data Collection
menu screen.

Rotor Speed - Enter the speed at which the rotor was

running during the reference run and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field (Rotor/Wt Radius).

4 - 34 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Trial Run

Rotor/Wt Radius - Enter the distance from the center of

rotation to where the trial weight is to be attached
and press < ENTER> .
• After configuring all Setup fields, press
< ESCAPE> , the Microlog computes an esti-
mated trial weight to see in Trial Run #1 (Figure
4 - 23).
dbch3-23.pcx

Figure 4 - 23. The Calculation Screen.

The trial weight is computed to produce a centrifugal

force, which is 10% of the static (at rest) weight of the ro-
tor supported by the bearing.

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced

(Planes: 2, separately), the estimated
weight shown is for plane 1. Another
weight of equal value must be placed in
plane 2 for Trial Run #2.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 35
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trial Run

¾ It is important to select an appropriate

trial weight. The trial weight should pro-
duce a magnitude change of 30% and/or a
phase angle change of at least 30 degrees.
If the weight is too small, a balance run is
wasted since no changes are seen. If the
trial weight is too large, it may damage
the machine, especially if it operates
above critical speed.

Trial Weight Setup

> To access the Trial Weight Setup options:
• From the Trial Run menu, press 2 or move the
pointer bar to 2:Trial Weight Setup and press
< ENTER> . The Trial Weight Setup screen
displays (Figure 4 - 24).
dbch3-25.pcx

Figure 4-24. The Weight Field for Plane 1.

4 - 36 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Trial Run

Trial Weight Setup fields are:

Plane 1/Weight - Enter the size of weight (magnitude)

computed by the Microlog in its Estimate Trial
Weight Calculation (or chosen by you) and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field (Plane 1/Angle).

Plane 1/Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight will

be attached and press < ENTER> .

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced,

(Planes: 2, separately), the last two steps
should be repeated for plane 2 (Figure 4 -
25).
dbch3-24.pcx

Figure 4 - 25.
The Trial Weight Setup Screen for Planes:2, Separately.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 37
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trial Run

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Trial Run

menu.

Trial Run
Take TW1 Data - Point A - This data collection run is
made with the trial weight (entered in the Trial
Weight Setup menu) attached at the point A end of
the rotor (plane 1). Vibration data is collected at
Point A.

Take TW1 Data - Point B - This data collection run is

made with the trial weight (entered in the Trial
Weight Setup menu) attached at the point A end of
the rotor (plane 1). Vibration data is collected at
Point B.

Take TW2 Data - Point A - This data collection run is

made with the trial weight (entered in the Trial
Weight Setup menu) attached at the point B end of
the rotor (plane 2). Vibration data is collected at
Point A.

¾ If you selected Weights Left In For-

ever:Yes, the trial weights from Trial Run
1 will remain attached.

Take TW2 Data - Point B - This data collection run is

made with the trial weight (entered in the Trial
Weight Setup menu) attached at the point B end of
the rotor (plane 2). Vibration data is collected at
Point B.

Correction Weight
• From the Trial Run menu, select Correction
Weight and press < ENTER> . The Correc-

4 - 38 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Trial Run

tion Weight Placement screen displays (Figure

4 - 26).
dbch3-34.pcx

Figure 4 - 26.
The Correction Weight Placement Screen.

Based on the data collected in the reference run(s) and

trial run(s), suggested initial correction weights and place-
ment angles are computed and displayed. These are the in-
itial values used to correct the imbalance.

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced

(Planes: 2, separately), the display
shows two sets of values for magnitude
and phase (Figure 4 - 27).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 39
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trial Run

dbch3-33.pcx

Figure 4 - 27.
The Correction Weight Placement
Screen for Two Plane Balancing.

Correction Weight Run

Take CW Data - Point A - This data collection run is
made with trial weight removed and correction
weights installed with the data collected on Point A.

Take CW Data - Point B - This data collection run is

made with trial weight removed and correction
weights installed with the data collected on Point B.

Splitting One Weight Into Two

Sometimes, a weight cannot conveniently be placed at the
angle recommended by balancing computations. This

4 - 40 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Trial Run

menu performs the necessary computation to allow you to

split one weight into two weights.

Setup
> To split one weight into two:
• In the Correction Weight Placement screen,
press F1 and press < ENTER> . The Setup
screen displays (Figure 4 - 28).
bscn2-54.pcx

Figure 4 - 28. The Weight to Split Field.

Setup menu fields are:

Weight to Split - Enter the size of the weight which you

wish to split into two weights and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field (Weight Angle).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 41
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trial Run

Weight Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight to be

split is now installed and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Split Wt 1 An-
gle).

Split Wt 1 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish to

install weight 1 and press < ENTER> . The pointer
bar advances to the next field (Split Wt 2 Angle).

Split Wt 2 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish to

install weight 2 and press < ENTER> .
• When finished entering data, press
< ESCAPE> , the Microlog automatically cal-
culates and displays the necessary weights and
angles (Figure 4 - 29).
spl-cal.w mf

Figure 4 - 29.
The Split Weight Calculation Screen.

4 - 42 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Trim Run

Trim Run

¾ The first step in conducting a trim run is

to calculate the weight required for the
trim run. With the trim weight installed,
a trim run can now be conducted.

> To conduct a trim data collection run:

• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 5
or move the pointer bar to 5:Trim Run. The
Trim Run menu displays (Figure 4 - 30).
tmrn-mn.w mf

Figure 4 - 30. The Trim Run Menu.

• Select 2:Take Data - Point A to collect trim

run data. The Trim Run Data Collection screen
displays (Figure 4 - 31).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 43
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trim Run

D25-2a.pcx

Figure 4 - 31.
The Trim Run Data Collection Screen.

¾ When you select Reference Run, Trial

Run, or Trim Run, a screen similar to
Figure 4 - 21 displays for all three runs.

• Press < ENTER> to save the collected data.

¾ If set to 2,Planes Separately, repeat the

above steps for Trim Run - Point B.

• To review and verify that the trim run data is ac-

ceptable, select Display Trim Data. The Trim
Run Data screen displays, (Figure 4 - 32).

4 - 44 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Trim Run

trun-dat.w mf

Figure 4 - 32. The Trim Run Data Screen.

• Review the trim run data and if acceptable,

press < ESCAPE> to return to the Trim Run
menu.

¾ If trim run is unacceptable, you may wish

to save this data temporarily for reference
purposes and run the trim run again.

> To save this data:

• Select Log Data option, the data is automat-
ically saved in temporary buffer.
The temporary log buffer has data storage space for 2
runs. The first run data is saved on the top of the log
(old), and the second (if any) is saved on the bottom
(new).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 45
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Trim Run

> To rerun the trim run:

• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Calculate
Trim Weight. The Trim Run Data screen dis-
plays (Figure 4 - 33).
t rim-cal.w mf

Figure 4 - 33. The Trim Run Data Screen.

Based on the data collected in the previous trim run(s),

suggested initial correction weights and placement angles
are computed and displayed. These values are used to cor-
rect the imbalance.
The Cumulative correction is the cumulative vector sum
of the initial correction weight plus any subsequent trim
weights.

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced

(Planes: 2, separately), the display
shows two sets of values for magnitude
and phase.

4 - 46 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
The Review/Enter Data Screens

¾ Refer to the Splitting One Weight Into

Two section on pages 4 - 41 through 4 -
42 for information concerning F1-Split
Weight.

The Review/Enter Data Screens

The purpose of the Review/Enter Data screen is to allow
you to view and/or change previously entered data.

> To access the Review/Enter Data screen:

• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 6
or move the pointer bar to 6:Review/Enter
Data and press < ENTER> . The Review/En-
ter Data menu displays (Figure 4 - 34).
revdatmn.w mf

Figure 4 - 34.
The Review/Enter Data Screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 47
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
The Review/Enter Data Screens

The data collected for each run may be reviewed and

changed if desired.

• Select the run (Reference Run, Trial Run, or

Trim Run) you wish to review and press < EN-
TER> , the screen in Figure 4 - 35 displays.

¾ The screens for a “ one-plane” rotor

(Planes: 1) contain only one trial run and
one point (point A).
dbch3-31.pcx

Figure 4 - 35.
An Example Review/Enter Data Screen.

Speed - View the speed collected in the Reference Run.

Change it if desired and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Point A/Mag).

4 - 48 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
The Review/Enter Data Screens

¾ Magnitude units in the following screens

are initialized to a default value. If these
units appear to be incorrect for your input
setup, take some data. After data collec-
tion, the units are updated to the units you
selected in the Input Setup screen.

Point A/Mag - View the magnitude collected in the

Reference Run. Change it if desired and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field (Point A/Phase).

Point A/Phase - View the phase collected in the

Reference Run. Change it if desired and press
< ENTER> .

¾ If a “ two-plane” rotor is being balanced,

(Planes: 2, separately), the last two steps
should be repeated for point B.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Review/En-

ter Data menu.

Correction Weight
If 2, Planes separately and Static-Dynamic Mode:Yes is
selected, Initial and Trim Weight menu selections display
the combined static and couple correction data (Figure 4-
36).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 49
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
The Review/Enter Data Screens

fig4-36.pcx

Figure 4 - 36.

View Run Data

> To view the run data information:
• From the Review/Enter Data screen, press 6 or
move the pointer bar to 6:View Run Data and
press < ENTER> . The View Run Data
screen displays (Figure 4 - 37).

4 - 50 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
The Review/Enter Data Screens

vrndata.w mf

Figure 4 - 37. The View Run Data Screen.

¾ All data displayed is for the currently

loaded job, whether it is the completion
of a new balance job, or a previously
saved job that has just been loaded.
The Reference Run section displays the speed, magnitude
and phase data taken during the reference run.
In the Trial Run section, the speed, magnitude and phase
data are the result of using trial weights (not shown). The
weight and angle component of the Trial Run is the initial
or correction weight data resulting from the trial run.
In the Trim Run section, the speed, magnitude and phase
data is the result of applying the weight and angle compo-
nents in the trim run.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 51
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
The Review/Enter Data Screens

The Influence Coeff Screen

> To enter previously recorded influence coefficients for
a single plane rebalance:
• From the Review/Enter Data menu, press 7 or
move the pointer bar to 7:Influence Coeff and
press < ENTER> . The Review/Enter Influ
Co screen displays (Figure 4 - 38).
ahh.pcx

Figure 4 - 38.
The Review/Enter Influ Co Screen for a
Single-Plane Rebalance.

In the case of single-plane balancing, only one influ-

ence coefficient magnitude and one phase are entered.

4 - 52 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Save Balance Job

> To enter previously recorded influence coefficients for

a two plane rebalance:
• From the Review/Enter Data menu, press 7 or
move the pointer bar to 7:Influence Coeff and
press < ENTER> .
Dual-plane balancing uses four influence coefficients.

Save Balance Job

> To save your balance job:
• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 7
or move the pointer bar to 7:Save Balance Job,
the Microlog automatically saves your balance
job information.

The Utility Functions Menu

> To access the Balancing (advanced) menu Utility Func-

tions screen:
• From the Balancing (advanced) menu, press 8
or move the pointer bar to 8:Utility Functions
and press < ENTER> (Figure 4 - 39).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 53
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Combining Weights

bscn2-44.pcx

Figure 4 - 39. The Utility Functions Menu.

Combining Weights
After your balancing runs, you may want to combine your
initial and trim weights into a single weight. This menu
performs the necessary computation to allow you to substi-
tute one weight for the original two.

Setup
> To access the Combine Weights Setup screen:
• From the Utility Functions menu, press 1 or
move the pointer bar to 1:Combine Weights
and press < ENTER> . The Combine
Weights menu displays.
• In the Combine Weights menu, press 1 or
move the pointer bar to 1:Setup and press

4 - 54 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Combining Weights

< ENTER> . The Setup menu displays (Fig-

ure 4 - 40).
bscn2-46.pcx

Figure 4 - 40. The Weight 1/Weight Field.

Setup menu fields are:

Weight 1/Weight - Enter the size of weight 1 and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field (Weight 1/Angle).

Weight 1/Angle - Enter the angle at which weight 1 was

attached to the rotor and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Weight
2/Weight).

Weight 2/Weight - Enter the size of weight 2 and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the next
field (Weight 2/Angle).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 55
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Combining Weights

Weight 2/Angle - Enter the angle at which weight 2 was

attached to the rotor and press < ENTER> .

• When finished entering data, press

< ESCAPE> to return to the Combine
Weights menu.

Calculations
• From the Combine Weights menu, press 2 or
move the pointer bar to 2:Calculation and press
< ENTER> . After a moment of computation,
the Microlog displays the combined weight and
angle. The Calculation screen displays (Figure
4 - 41).
calcul.pcx

Figure 4 - 41. The Calculation Screen.

4 - 56 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Splitting One Weight Into Two

Splitting One Weight Into Two

Sometimes, a weight cannot conveniently be placed at the
angle recommended by balancing computations. This
menu does the necessary computation to allow you to split
one weight into two weights.

Setup
> To split one weight into two:
• In the Utility Functions screen, press 2 or
move the pointer bar to 2:Split Weight and press
< ENTER> . The Split Weight menu displays.
• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Setup and
press < ENTER> . The Setup screen displays
(Figure 4 - 42).
bscn2-59.pcx

Figure 4 - 42. The Setup Screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 57
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Splitting One Weight Into Two

Setup menu fields are:

Weight to Split - Enter the size of the weight which you

wish to split into two weights and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field (Weight Angle).

Weight Angle - Enter the angle at which the weight to be

split is now installed and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Split Wt 1 An-
gle).

Split Wt 1 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish to

install weight 1 and press < ENTER> . The pointer
bar advances to the next field (Split Wt 2 Angle).

Split Wt 2 Angle - Enter the angle at which you wish to

install weight 2 and press < ENTER> .
When finished entering data, press < ESCAPE> to return
to the Split Weight menu.

Calculations
• From the Split Weight menu, press 2 or move
the pointer bar to 2:Calculation and press
< ENTER> . After computation, the Microlog
displays the necessary weights and angles. The
Calculation screen displays (Figure 4 - 43).

4 - 58 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Balance Job Reports

splw g-cal.pcx

Figure 4 - 43. The Calculation Screen.

Balance Job Reports

If you wish to save the results of your balancing run, you
may output your results to a printer. Refer to Chapter 7,
Reports for further information on printer connections
and on which printers are compatible with your Microlog.
A balance report makes a record of the steps you per-
formed during balancing. It records trial weights, runout
values, reference run data, trial run data, influence coeffi-
cients (single-channel Microlog only), and initial and trim
correction weights.
The report is accessed from the Balancing (advanced)
menu.
• From the Utility Functions menu, press 3 or
move the pointer bar to 3:Report and press
< ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 59
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Balance Job Reports

The layout for a “ two plane” Microlog balance report is

shown below (Figure 4 - 44).
bscn3-49.pcx

Figure 4 - 44.
A Two Plane Balance Report.

4 - 60 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Clearing the Current Job From Temporary Memory (RAM)

Clearing the Current Job From Temporary Memory

(RAM)
> To clear the current job from memory:
• From the Utility Functions menu, press 4 or
move the pointer bar to 4:Clear Job and press
< ENTER> .

Clear Job - This selection clears all run data from the Mi-
crolog’s memory to prepare for balancing a rotor.
When data has been cleared, the pointer bar returns
to the Utility Functions menu.

Reset Setup
Reset Setup - This selection resets the current balancing
setup configuration back to default.

Delete Job
Delete Job - This selection deletes the current job both
from RAM and permanent memory. When selected,
this option displays a message prompting for verifica-
tion of the deletion.

Advanced Balancing Tips

• When conducting identical balancing jobs, load
a previously saved, identical job, then go to Bal-
ance Setup and change the balance setup "ID:".
When saved, is saved as a separate balancing
job under the new ID.
• Prior to balancing, ensure that the CMVA60
date/time is set correctly. This data is saved

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 61
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Advanced Balancing Tips

with each job, and can be retrieved and dis-

played/printed at a later time with the job.
• If the Operator ID option is enabled and down-
loaded from PRISM (v1.30 or later), enabling
the operator ID option in the CMVA60
(Main/Utilities/Route Setup/Operator ID Tag-
ging) tags each balancing job with the operator
ID. When enabled, the ID can be displayed by
selecting Balancing (Advanced)/Review/Enter
Data/View Data, and printed on reports.
Balance Setup
In the Balance Setup, normal analyzer input options
are available, such as Type, Full Scale, Detection,
and Sensitivity.
The Microlog is set to the tracking mode, which de-
faults to Order analysis, 100 lines of resolution, Ex-
ternal trigger, External trigger source, Uniform
window and 10 orders for normal bandwidth. If
wide or narrow bandwidth is selected, then 20X or
10X orders is set up. These orders essentially reflect
as 20%, 10%, or 5% bandwidth about the 1X FFT
component. The narrow bandwidth is useful for en-
hancing the signal to noise ratio, when the trim run
signals are imbedded in noise.
Average Type
Should be set to Average:Off or Average:Sync
Time. If phase readings vary, even though the run-
ning speed is stable within tenths of CPM, then Aver-
age:Average or Average:Sync Time should be
selected.

¾ Sync Time averaging is most advanta-

geous when nearby machines are running
at nearly the same speed, and producing

4 - 62 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Advanced Balancing Tips

crosstalk. These non-coherent crosstalk

components tend to a zero average using
synchronous time averaging.
Shaft Trigger
The trigger input to the CMVA60 can be applied
either to the Microlog’s BNC trigger input, or the
phase adapter/multi-pin connector. The phase adapt-
er is used with the light sensing, laser beam, or SKF
StrobeLite systems. The outputs from these devices
are TTL levels.
SKF StrobeLite
This unit connects to the phase adapter with a cable
that takes the accelerometer signal for lock and track
operation, sending back a TTL trigger signal to the
Microlog digital interrupt controls.
The StrobeLite is functionally set up by these sequen-
tial steps:
• The StrobeLite is adjusted by the internal gener-
ator until the flash is synchronized to reflect a
1X stopped view of the reference shaft marking.
• When the shaft reflective reference is a stable
view, the strobe control is switched to the track-
ing position. At this time, it is important that
the internal control knob remain in a locked po-
sition without change. The knob not only con-
trols the internal generator, but also controls a
bandpass filter to enhance the 1X accelerometer
component.
• When the accelerometer tracks and locks the
flash to a 1X synchronous display, the phase ad-
justment is positioned such that the shaft mark
coincides to a reference point on the bearing
pedestal. This spatial reference point is used for
all measurement runs; Initial, Trial, and Trim.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 63
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Advanced Balancing Tips

• Only when phase adjustment positions the flash-

ing shaft marking to this spatial reference point
are the Take Data measurements valid.
• The StrobeLite’s slope must always be positive
since it is the positive slope that shifts with the
phase adjustment.
Trim Run
The trim run is performed after the data from the In-
itial Run and the Trial Runs are entered into the cal-
culations for the Influence Coefficients. Once these
coefficients have been computed, they can be used in
future balancing of these specific machines by manual
entry in the Review/Enter Influence Coefficient win-
dow.

¾ If the coefficients are manually entered,

then all Take Data measurements thereaf-
ter are trim runs.
Combine and Split Weights
These functions are useful when several weights must
be positioned to prescribed balance points to be
equivalent to the needed correction weight (Split
Wght), or when several weights must be combined to
be equivalent to the specified correction weights.
The Combined Weight function is also useful for cal-
culating the sum or difference of Take Data measure-
ments. It is well known that the vector sum of the
two bearing measurements in two plane is static im-
balance, while the difference is twice the couple im-
balance.
The Combined Weight function computes twice the
couple by adding 180o to one measurement entry (dif-
ference). It is only necessary to enter the two vectors
Mag/Phase for the static (sum).

4 - 64 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Tracking Filter

Runout or Slow Roll Vectors

The Eddy Probe transducer is used when Point
Type:Displacement is selected. A Runout field ap-
pears in the Setup screen which modifies the meas-
urement of each Take Data run. Eddy current
transducers measure the shaft surface variations as
well as the high spot dynamics. The shaft surface im-
perfections often add to this dynamic signal as distor-
tions that affect measurement accuracy, especially
during balancing. The slow roll or runout vector cor-
rection is performed at low speeds where imbalance
forces are negligible and the surface imperfections
are the motor component contributions. Once the
shaft is measured for runout, this data is vectorially
subtracted from each data collection run.

Tracking Filter
The Tracking Filter application can be used as a balanc-
ing tool. It produces a tabular display of magnitude and
phase of the shaft vibration high spot relative to an abso-
lute shaft reference.

> To access the Tracking Filter menu:

• From the Applications menu, press 3 or move
pointer bar to 3:Tracking Filter and press
< ENTER> . The Tracking Filter menu dis-
plays (Figure 4 - 45).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 65
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Tracking Filter

app-3.pcx

Figure 4 - 45.
The Tracking Filter Menu.

> To take data:

• Press 1 or move the pointer bar to 1:Take Data
and press < ENTER> . The screen in Figure 4
- 46 displays. Data collection automatically pro-
ceeds.

4 - 66 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Tracking Filter

d252.pcx

Figure 4 - 46.
The Tracking Filter Data Collection Screen.

• Press < ENTER> to save the collected data.

> To set up the Tracking Filter options:

• From the Tracking Filter menu, press 2 or
move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and press
< ENTER> . The Tracking Filter Setup
screen displays (Figure 4 - 47).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 67
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Tracking Filter

app-6.pcx

Figure 4 - 47.
The Tracking Filter Setup Screen.

Tracking Filter Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 16 characters to uniquely identify this job

and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to
the next field (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identify

the equipment and the exact location
where a measurement is to be recorded.

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press < EN-

TER> The pointer bar advances to the next field
(Type).

4 - 68 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

¾ Refer to pages 4 - 23 through 4 - 27 for

descriptions of Tracking Filter Setup
fields:

Type Full Scale

Detection Input
Bandwidth Average Type
Trigger Slope

Cyclic Analysis
The Applications menu’s Cyclic Analysis option supports
time based, dynamic signal analysis displayed in degrees
or in milliseconds, providing a plot of magnitude vs. crank
angle of cyclic events.

> To access the Cyclic Analysis menu:

• From the Applications menu, press 4, or move
the pointer bar to 4:Cyclic Analysis and press
< ENTER> . The Cyclic Analysis screen dis-
plays (Figure 4 - 48).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 69
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

app-4.pcx

Figure 4 - 48.
The Cyclic Analysis Screen.

> To take data:

• Press 1, or move the pointer bar to 1:Take Data
and press < ENTER> . The screen in Figure 4
- 49 displays. Data collection automatically pro-
ceeds.

4 - 70 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

app-9.pcx

Figure 4 - 49.
The Cyclic Analysis Take Data Screen.

• Press < SAVE> to save the collected data.

> To set up Cyclic Analysis options:

• Press 2 or move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and
press < ENTER> . The screen in Figure 4 -
50 displays.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 71
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

app-8.pcx

Figure 4 - 50.
The Cyclic Analysis Setup Screen.

Cyclic Analysis Setup screen fields are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Desc).

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Type).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identify

the equipment and the exact location
where a measurement is to be recorded.

4 - 72 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

Type - The type of measurement (acceleration, velocity,

displacement, volts, SEE, ENV Acc, ENV Vel, pres-
sure) which depends upon the type of seismic sensor
used (accelerometer, velocity pickup, proximity
probe, or SEE sensor). Press MENU to view the
choices.
• Select your choice for Type of measurement
with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Full Scale).
Full Scale - The units for this field were automatically de-
termine when you selected Type.
• Enter a numerical full scale value and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Detection).
Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.
• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS or Pk
to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Input).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) per

Engineering Unit (EU) and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the screen
(Cycles).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 73
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

Cycles - Enter the number of 1X cycles you wish to view

in the full scale display and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Samples).
For a given number of cycles and samples, the follow-
ing table specifies the maximum rotational speed. If
the maximum speed is exceeded unpredictable results
occur.

Samples
Cycles
256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384
Maximum Rotational Speed
1 200 Hz 100 Hz 50 Hz 25 Hz 12.5 Hz 6.25 Hz 3.13 Hz
2 400 200 100 50 25 12.5 6.25
3 600 300 150 75 37.5 18.75 9.38
4 800 400 200 100 50 25 12.5
5 1000 500 250 125 62.5 31.25 15.63
6 1200 600 300 150 75 37.5 18.75

For example, if 1 cycle and 512 samples is chosen the rota-

tional speed cannot exceed 100 Hz.

Samples - The total number of samples in the number of

cycles that you wish to view in the full scale display.
Press MENU to view the choices.
• Select a value for Samples with the pointer bar
and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Average
Type).

4 - 74 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Off - The same as setting the number of averages to
1; the data is scaled by the selected method of detec-
tion and will update at its maximum.
Sync Time - Averaging in the time domain. This
method of averaging requires a reference trigger.
Components within the signal which are synchronous
with the reference trigger are reinforced, while noise
quickly averages out. Synchronous time domain aver-
aging produces the most improvement in signal to
noise ratio, and is advantageous whenever it is
deemed necessary to extract very low amplitude sig-
nals or to minimize the noise produced by the vibra-
tion of other machines nearby. When this method of
averaging is selected, the spectrum produced and dis-
played is the FFT of the averaged synchronous time
domain samples.
• Select your choice for Type with the pointer bar
and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Average
Mode).

Average Mode - Displays only if Average Type:Sync

Time is selected. Press MENU to view the choices.
Cont. - Averaging of the latest N samples, where N
is the number of averages selected for the sample.
Equivalent to exponential averaging where the latest
spectrum ensemble replaces the oldest in the averaged
sum.
Finite - Averaging proceeds for N samples. The aver-
aging process stops and the result is displayed. (This
is the averaging mode in Route Spectrum:Show dur-
ing Route data collection.)

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 75
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Cyclic Analysis

Repeat - Averaging proceeds for N samples, where N

is the number of averages you chose for the sample.
The spectrum average is displayed after N samples
are taken. The display is updated after each finite av-
erage.
• Select your choice for Average Mode with the
pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Averages).

Averages - Displays only if Average Type: Sync Time is

selected. If an external trigger is available (time syn-
chronous averaging is allowable in Average Type),
set Averages to achieve adequate signal-to-noise en-
hancement in the time domain (from 4 to above 200
depending on how close the conflicting signals are).
• Enter the number of spectrum ensembles to be
summed (between 1 and 9999).
• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (X Axis
Label).

X Axis Label - Allows time data to be displayed in de-

grees as a multiple of the machine rotation (for exam-
ple: 360, 720 degrees), or in milliseconds. Press
MENU to view choices.
• Select Degree or MSec with the pointer bar and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Trigger Slope).

4 - 76 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view choices.

• Select plus or minus with the pointer bar to de-
termine whether the trigger occurs on a rising
or descending signal.
• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Trigger Delay).

Trigger Delay - Trigger delay is used to view pre-trigger

or post-trigger information.
• Enter number of degrees to offset the reference
pulse. The pointer bar advances to the next
field on the screen (Cursor Type).

Cursor Type - The full width cross is easiest to observe

and recommended for use. Press MENU to view
choices.
• Select Cursor Type with the pointer bar and
press < ENTER> .

Current Analysis Setup

The Applications menu’s Current Analysis option simpli-
fies the process of analyzing and diagnosing AC induction
motor rotor bar defects.

> To access the Current Analysis menu:

• At the Applications menu, press 5 or move the
pointer bar to 5:Current Analysis and press
< ENTER> . The Current Analysis Take
Data/Setup menu appears.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 77
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

> To set up Current Analysis options:

• From the Current Analysis menu, press 2 or
move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and press
< ENTER> . The Current Analysis Setup
screen displays (Figure 4 - 51).
app-10.pcx

Figure 4 - 51.
The Current Analysis Setup Screen.

Current Analysis Setup screen field options are:

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Desc).

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Type).

4 - 78 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

¾ Together, the ID and Description identify

the equipment and the exact location
where a measurement is to be recorded.

Type - Determines type of current data collected. Press

MENU to view choices.
Current Zoom - Allows zoomed spectrum analysis
of AC induction motor input current.
Enveloped Current - Allows analysis of the AC in-
duction motor pole passing frequency by demodulat-
ing the input current signal.

¾ The POINT Type selected determines

which Setup screens fields will be dis-
played.

Line Frequency - The frequency of the AC power sup-

plied to the motor tested.
• Enter a numerical value for Line Frequency
(for example, 60 Hz) and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Full Scale).

¾ Current Zoom measurements use this

field to determine the frequency to zoom
on. Enveloped Current measurements
use this as a reference parameter for dis-
play only.

Full Scale - The units for this field are amps.

• Enter a numerical full scale value and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Input).

Input - Enter transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv) per

Engineering Unit (EU) and press < ENTER> . The

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 79
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

pointer bar advances to the next field o the screen

(Detection).

¾ The sensitivity of the motor current clamp

must be modified when not directly meas-
uring the motor line current. The current
to the control station is always reduced by
line current transformer. For example,
when measurements are made at the mo-
tor control station, if the transformer is
100 to 1, then the normal motor current
clamp sensitivity must be changed from 1
mV/Amp to .01 mV/Amp.
Detection - Press MENU to vie the choices.
• Select one of three methods (Peak, RMS or Pk
to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Synchronous
RPM).

Lines - Lines determines the basic resolution of the spec-

trum. Press MENU to view the choices.
frequency range
= frequency seqment size
lines resolution
1,000 Hz
= 2.5 Hz
400 lines
If, for example, you choose 400 lines and a frequency
range from 0 to 1,000 Hz, the basic resolution of the
spectrum will be 1,000 divided by 400 or 2.5 Hz.
This means that the x-axis is divided into 400 seg-
ments spaced 2.5 Hz apart.

4 - 80 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

¾ Recognize that increased resolution re-

quires increased time for data collection
and consumes more storage memory.

• Select your choice for number of Lines of reso-

lution with the pointer bar and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Number of Averages).

Number of Averages - If Average Type is Pk Hold, set

Number of Averages:1, and set Average
Mode:Cont. Since Average Mode:Cont is chosen,
the peak value is updated for each spectrum ensemble.
If Average Type is Average, set Number of Aver-
ages:6. This is a reasonable number of spectrum av-
erages to allow a POINT measurement to be made in
less than 10 seconds.
If an external trigger is available (time synchronous
averaging is allowable in Average Type), set Num-
ber of Averages to achieve adequate signal-to-noise
enhancement in the time domain (from 4 to above
200 depending on how close the conflicting signals
are).
• Enter the number of spectrum ensembles to be
summed (between 1 and 9999).
• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Average
Type).

Average Type - Press MENU to view the choices.

Off - Produces the same results as setting Average
Type:Average and Number of Averages:1. The
FFT displays components scaled by the selected
method of detection and updates at its maximum, real-
time rate.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 81
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

Average - The summation of the magnitude of each

spectral line is divided by the total number of aver-
ages (ensemble averaging). This is the most fre-
quently used method of averaging for routine data
collection and analysis.
Pk Hold - Peak Hold holds the highest value received
at each spectral line during the averaging time. This
method of averaging is very useful when the signal
contains a great deal of amplitude variation and the
primary objective of the analysis is to see the maxi-
mum reached by each component.

¾ For time waveforms, Average Type:Aver-

age and Average Type:Pk Hold are not
recommended. Use Average Type:Sync
Time instead.
Sync(hronous) Time - Averaging in the time do-
main. This method of averaging requires a reference
trigger. Components within the signal which are syn-
chronous with the reference trigger are reinforced,
while noise quickly averages out. Synchronous time
domain averaging produces the most improvement in
signal to noise ratio, and is advantageous whenever it
is deemed necessary to extract very low amplitude sig-
nals or to minimize the “ noise” produced by the vi-
bration of other machines nearby. When this method
of averaging is selected, the spectrum produced and
displayed is the FFT of the averaged synchronous
time domain samples.

¾ To display Sync(hronous) Time averag-

ing set the Trigger Source to External.

• Select your choice for Average Type with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The

4 - 82 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

pointer bar advances to the next field on the

screen (Average Mode).

Average Mode - Select the type of FFT average comple-

tion. Press MENU to view the choices.
Cont(inuous) - Averaging of the latest N samples,
where N is the number of averages selected for the
sample. Equivalent to exponential averaging where
the latest spectrum ensemble replaces the oldest in
the averaged sum.
Finite - Averaging proceeds for N samples. The aver-
aging process stops and the result is displayed. (This
is the averaging mode in Route Spectrum:Show dur-
ing Route data collection.)
Repeat - Averaging proceeds for N samples, where N
is the number of averages you chose for the sample.
The spectrum average is displayed after N samples
are taken. The display is updated after each finite av-
erage.

• Select your choice for Average Mode with the

pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Average Overlap).

Average Overlap - Overlap processing is advantageous

when the time required to gather a time record is
much longer than the time needed to calculate an
FFT spectrum. In the Microlog this occurs at fre-
quencies below 1,000 Hz (60,000 CPM).
For lower frequencies, the amount of overlap can be
increased to reduce the time required to collect a
given number of averages. Recognize, however, that

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 83
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

the greater the overlap, the more information shared

between averages. Press MENU to view the choices.
Max - Uses whatever data is in the time record at the
time. This can be existing data, new data, or a mix-
ture depending on how long it takes to collect time re-
cord data. Results in the shortest averaging time but
may lack statistical accuracy.
75% - Uses 75% of existing data and 25% of new
data to calculate new FFT.
50% - Uses 50% of existing data and 50% of new
data to calculate new FFT.
None - Each spectrum ensemble is new data added to
the sum.
Overlap processing is used to obtain enough new en-
semble data for an accurate average. If the maximum
frequency is low and the FFT process time is fast, the
average sum would include a high percent of old data
with maximum overlap. Below 2 kHz, 50% overlap
and six averages is a reasonable ROUTE setup.

• Select your choice for Average Overlap with

the pointer bar and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Window).

Window - The type of window used in the FFT process-

ing. A window function must be applied to any peri-
odic time record prior to performing an FFT to
minimize leakage errors. The Hanning and Flat Top
window functions attenuate to zero both the leading
and trailing edges of the time domain buffer (to pre-
vent leakage error caused by discontinuities in the
time record). Press MENU to view the choices.

4 - 84 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Setup

Hanning - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-

tion that provides better frequency resolution than
Flat Top, but with reduced amplitude accuracy. Use-
ful for machine vibration measurements, general pur-
pose measurements, and measurements containing
random noise.
Uniform - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-
tion with uniform weighting across time. Useful for
measuring transients or mechanical response measure-
ments and in tracking mode.
Flat Top - A dynamic signal analyzer window func-
tion which provides the best amplitude accuracy for
measuring discrete frequency components. Useful
for calibration or machine vibration measurements us-
ing displacement probes in fluid-film bearings.
Select your choice for Window with the pointer bar
and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to
the next field on the screen (Synchronous RPM).

Synchronous RPM - Enter the motor’s Synchronous

RPM number located on the motor nameplate.
• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Motor
Nameplate Data).

Motor Nameplate Data - Press MENU to view choices.

OFF - Data not necessary for searching for pole pass-
ing frequency.
Specify - Allows specific motor information to be en-
tered.
• Select your choice for Motor Nameplate Data
and press < ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 85
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Data Collection

¾ When Motor Nameplate Data:Specify is

selected, three additional fields are dis-
played on the Current Analysis Setup
screen.
Rated Full Load RPM - Enter the motor’s Rated
Full Load RPM number located on the motor name-
plate.
• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Rated
Full Load Amps).
Rated Full Load Amps - Enter the motor’s Rated
Full Load Amps number located on the motor name-
plate.
• Press < ENTER> and the pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Rated No
Load Amps).
Rated No Load Amps - Enter the motor’s Rated No
Load Amps number located on the motor nameplate.
This completes Current Analysis set up.

Current Analysis Data Collection

Current Zoom
> To collect current zoom data:
• With Type:Current Zoom selected in the Cur-
rent Analysis Setup menu, press 1 or move the
pointer bar to 1:Take Data and press < EN-
TER> . The Current Analysis Data Collec-
tion screen displays (Figure 4 - 52) and data
collection automatically proceeds.

4 - 86 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Data Collection

catd-1.pcx

Figure 4 - 52.
The Current Zoom Data Collection Screen.

Screen information includes:

Number of Averages - The number of averages included

in this measurement.

Line Freq - The power line’s frequency (50Hz or 60 Hz).

Pole Pass Freq - The frequency where defect amplitude is

measured (motor poles x motorslip).

Cursor Freq - The frequency of the cursor position.

Load - The actual motor load current.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 87
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Data Collection

RPM/Slip - The motor running speed at cursor position.

% Slip based on the RPM and the entered Synchro-
nous RPM.
Sync RPM − RPM
% Slip = x 100
Sync RPM

Condition Ratio - The ratio of the defect amplitude to line

current as a relative DB ratio.
Defect Amplitude
Condition Ratio = −20 log ( )
Line Current Amplitude

• Press < SAVE> to save the collected data.

• When measurement is complete, pressing the
F3 function key displays the ROTOR BAR
CONDITION ASSESSMENT REPORT
screen (Figure 4 - 53).
conases.pcx

Figure 4 - 53.
The Rotor Bar Condition Assessment Report Screen.

4 - 88 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Data Collection

The ROTOR BAR CONDITION ASSESSMENT RE-

PORT screen displays a table of motor defect diagnostic
criteria. For example, 54-60 implies excellent operation.

• Press F3 to display the CONDITION ASSESS-

MENT LIMITATIONS screen (Figure 4 - 54).
limit.pcx

Figure 4 - 54.
The Condition Assessment Limitations Screen.

The CONDITION ASSESSMENT LIMITATIONS

screen displays specific conditions which must be met in
order for the previous diagnosis to be accurate.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 89
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Current Analysis Data Collection

Enveloped Current
> To collect enveloped current data:
• With Type:Enveloped Current selected in the
Current Analysis Setup menu, press 1 or move
the pointer bar to 1:Take Data and press < EN-
TER> . The Current Analysis Data Collec-
tion screen displays (Figure 4 - 55) and data
collection automatically proceeds.
envelcur.pcx

Figure 4 - 55.
The Enveloped Current Data Collection Screen.

• Press < SAVE> to save the collected data.

The Condition Ratio for an Enveloped Current POINT
is the ratio of the peak at the cursor to the overall ampli-
tude. This ratio is expressed as a percentage.

Current Value at Cursor

Condition Ratio = x 100
Overall

4 - 90 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Bump Test

A condition ratio criteria has been empirically determined

for Envelope Current measurements. It has been sug-
gested that the rotor bar failure alert alarm be based on the
condition ratio exceeding 25%. That is, if the pole pass
peak level is greater than 25% of the overall RMS level,
then there is probable cause for concern of rotor degrada-
tion.

Bump Test
A bump test (also called a hammer test) determines the
natural frequencies of a machine or a structure. The idea
behind the test is that when an object is impacted or
“ bumped,” the object’s natural or resonant frequencies are
excited. If a spectrum is taken while the object is vibrat-
ing due to the impact, spectral peaks result, pinpointing
the object’s natural frequencies. A Microlog analyzer can
be used to capture this vibration response and to display a
spectrum showing the resonant or natural frequencies.

Why Do a Bump Test?

Vibration forces transmitted by rotating machines often ex-
cite natural resonances in attached structures. Whenever
such structural resonances appear, vibration responses are
amplified and can result in fatigue failures. Structural
resonances can also mask the cause of a machine’s vibra-
tion making it difficult to implement corrective machine
maintenance. Bump tests identify a structure’s resonant
modes and provide a maintenance engineer the opportunity
to change the resonance frequency so as to reduce or elimi-
nate damaging vibration.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 91
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Bump Test

> To perform a bump test with your Microlog:

• Attach an accelerometer to the CMVA60.
• From the Utilities/System Setup menu, move
the pointer bar to Connector and press MENU
to view choices (Figure 4 - 56).
syscon.pcx

Figure 4 - 56.
The System Settings/Connector Menu.

• Select the connector type for which the acceler-

ometer is attached.
• Attach the accelerometer to the test object (ma-
chine case or structure).
• From the Applications menu, press 6 or move
the pointer bar to 6:Bump Test and press < EN-
TER> . The Bump Test menu appears (Figure
4 - 57).

4 - 92 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Bump Test

bumptest.pcx

Figure 4 - 57. The Bump Test Menu.

Bump Test menu options are:

Take Data - Begins the data collection (Figure 4 - 58).

During data collection the Microlog automatically
compensates for a signal overload condition. To save
the data, press the SAVE key. Pressing the < ES-
CAPE> key exiting the data collection mode.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 93
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

bumptst2.pcx

Figure 4 - 58. The Bump Test Screen.

Setup - Allows the user to change the default settings for

Input, Full scale, Trigger Level and Maximum fre-
quency.

¾ Upon entering this menu option, a mes-

sage displays (only if parameter changes
are detected) prompting the operator to re-
set parameters back to default, if desired.

Run Up/Coast Down

The Applications menu’s Run Up/Coast Down option
performs an order analysis which requires a trigger and a
sensor input connected to either the BNCs or the 25-pin
connector. When the Microlog begins to collect data, it
first date and time stamps the current job. As the target
machine speed is ramping up or coasting down, it stores

4 - 94 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

the changing speed and its corresponding 1X speed magni-

tude and phase values in a temporary buffer. The data in
the buffer is available for the operator to inspect and to
print in both table and graphic formats at the end of the
data collection process. If the operator desires to save the
current job, the Microlog moves the data as well as the
setup parameters to the permanent storage memory (which
doesn’t require battery power), therefore, in the event of a
power loss, data is not loss. Each Microlog can store up
to a maximum of 20 jobs and each job may contain a maxi-
mum of 100 points.

¾ Currently, Run Up/Coast Down data can-

not be uploaded to PRISM.

> To initiate the Run Up/Coast Down operation:

¾ If an operator ID list has been down-

loaded and enabled, an operator ID must
be selected from the list to access the Ap-
plications menu
• From the Applications menu, press 7 or move
the pointer bar to 7:Run Up/Coast Down and
press < ENTER> . The Run Up/Coast Down
menu displays (Figure 4 - 59).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 95
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

rucd-mnu.pcx

Figure 4 - 59. The Run Up/Coast Down Menu.

Run Up/Coast Down menu options are:

1:Take Data - Begins the data collection process. When

the process is complete, the data in the temporary
buffer displays on the screen. The operator has the op-
tion to save the data by selecting the Save new Data
option from the Options menu or by pressing the
SAVE key. Temporary data may be deleted by press-
ing the < ESCAPE> key.

2:Setup - Displays fields for designating the job ID and de-

scription and to set up data collection parameters.
When reviewing a saved job from permanent mem-
ory, the setup parameters from the job being reviewed
are reloaded and can be read. The setup parameters
can also be reloaded from a saved job to eliminate
setup time.

4 - 96 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

3:Review Data - Chronologically displays a list of saved

jobs on the screen. The operator can select a job to re-
view, to print, or to delete.

Take Data
> To collect Run Up/Coast Down data:
• From the Applications menu, press 7 or move
the pointer bar to 7:Run Up/Coast Down op-
tion and press < ENTER> .
• If it is not already there, move the pointer bar to
1:Take Data and press < ENTER> .

¾ If the Microlog runs out of permanent

memory to save the next new job, the fol-
lowing message appears.

This unit can only hold 20 Run

Up/Coast Down jobs. Please enter Re-
view Data to delete one of the jobs in
memory before taking new data.
The screen of Figure 4 - 60 displays and allows the user to
verify that the inputs are installed correctly. If the inputs
are not correct, using this screen adjust the sensors until
they are correct.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 97
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

fig4-48.pcx

Figure 4 - 60.
The Run Up/Coast Down Take Data Screen.

When the inputs are OK, press< ENTER> , the screen in

Figure 4 - 61 displays. The CMVA60 is in the data collec-
tion mode and begins to collect data when the speed is
within the defined speed limits.

Figure 4 - 61.
The Run Up/Coast Down Take Data Screen.

4 - 98 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

¾ The viewing of the phase plot in review

can be switched between 0-360o and in
+ /-180o phase types regardless of the
phase type used when the data was re-
corded. The phase scale can be switched
in the Setup dialog.
Data fields on the screen are:

Overall - The overall magnitude in the appropriate unit.

Speed - The current speed in Hz or in CPM.

In Run-up mode, the target machine is initially
stopped, or running at a very low speed. The applica-
tion starts to record data when the speed has in-
creased above the Low Speed and terminates when
the current speed is greater than the High Speed.
In Coast-down mode, the target machine is initially
running at full speed. The application starts to record
data when the speed has decreased below the High
Speed and terminates when the current speed is less
than the Low Speed.
The speed displayed in this field before the Microlog starts
collecting data can be used to check if the tachometer is
correctly installed.

1xSpeed Mag - The 1X speed magnitude in the appropri-

ate units.
The Run Up/Coast Down application uses a simpler
but faster autorange process. Each time an over-
loaded signal occurs, it automatically doubles the full
scale.

1xSpeed Pha - The 1X speed phase in DEG.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 99
User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

Number of data points - The number of data points

stored in the temporary buffer. This field is 0 when
first entering the data collection mode and remains at
0 until the Microlog starts collecting data when the
Start Speed condition is satisfied. A maximum of
100 points are allowed for each job.

¾ When the Microlog is collecting data, its

power conserving automatic shutoff func-
tion is disabled.
The data collecting process terminates when one of the fol-
lowing conditions is met.
• The current speed satisfies the Speed condition.
• ESCAPE is pressed.
• The number of data points taken is equal to 100.
Upon termination, the recorded data displays in table for-
mat for inspection (Figure 4 - 62).
rucd-dat.pcx

Figure 4 - 62.
The Run Up/Coast Down Collected Data.

4 - 100 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

The first four lines on the screen display the job ID, job de-
scription, and time and date stamps when data was col-
lected. The sixth line displays column headings. The
seventh line displays column units. The Speed column unit
is CPM or Hz depending on the current system setup. The
Mag column unit is data type dependent. It can be dis-
played in English or Metric units, depending on the cur-
rent system setup. The next 16 lines display the data table.
The table can be either scrolled by line using the UP AR-
ROW or DOWN ARROW keys or by 16 line-page using
the PGUP or PGDN keys.
With the Microlog’s Run Up/Coast Down data collection
screen visible, press the MENU key to access several op-
tions (Figure 4 - 63).
rncd-opt.pcx

Figure 4 - 63.
The Run Up/Coast Down Options Menu.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 101

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

• To make a selection, press its number on the Mi-

crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to your
selection and press < ENTER> .

¾ For experienced operators, shortcut keys

are available to access each of the items in
the option menu.
The options are:

1:Data table (shortcut key F1) - Displays data in the table

format as previously described.

2:Bode plot (shortcut key F2) - Displays data in dual

graph display (Figure 4 - 64), Mag vs Speed and
Phase vs Speed.
bodeplot.bmp

Figure 4 - 64. A Bode Plot Screen.

¾ Phase display is continuous and Yscale

display may range multiple cycles.

4 - 102 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

¾ For ENV Acc POINTs, only the Mag vs

Speed graph displays, and the Pha field
at the top of the screen is eliminated.
The cross hair cursors simultaneously move across
both graphs as the LEFT CURSOR or RIGHT
CURSOR key is pressed. The cursors only stop at ac-
tual data records (no interpolation). The speed, mag-
nitude, phase, and Q values at the current location
display at the top of the screen. The MODE field in-
dicates whether the current job in run up or coast
down.
RU = Run Up
CD = Coast Down
The phase graph is plotted as 0/360 DEG or -180/
\180 DEG according to the how the setup was config-
ured when data was taken.
3:Polar plot (shortcut key F3) - Displays the tempo-
rary data in polar form (Figure 4 - 65).
POLARPLT.WMF

Figure 4 - 65. A Polar Plot Screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 103

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

The cross hair cursor traces along the graph as the

LEFT CURSOR or RIGHT CURSOR key is
pressed. Cursors only stop at actual data records (no
interpolation). The speed, magnitude, phase and Q
values at the current location display on top of the
screen. The MODE field indicates whether the cur-
rent job in run up or coast down.
RU = Run Up
CD = Coast Down
The current x and y coordinates display below the
graph. The option menu can be accessed by pressing
the MENU key to return to the data table or to per-
form other functions.

4:Save new data (shortcut key SAVE) - Saves the current

temporary data into permanent memory and returns
to the Run-up/Coast-down menu.

5:Print - Prints the data as displayed on the screen (in ta-

ble format or graphic format).

¾ The Microlog is compatible with either a

dot matrix or laser printer.
If the < ESCAPE> key is pressed, the following confir-
mation message displays before discarding the current data
in the temporary memory.
Run Up/Coast Down data in memory!
Save data before exit?Yes

• Press MENU to select a Yes or No response.

Yes - Data is saved before returning to the Run-
up/Coast down menu.

4 - 104 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

No - The screen returns to the Run-up/Coast down

menu. All data is erased from temporary memory.

¾ In the event that the Microlog turns itself

off to conserve battery power before data
is saved, data is not lost. Data remains in
temporary memory until the next time the
Run-up/Coast down application is run.
The screen automatically displays the data
for review before it collects data for the
new job. However, if the Microlog runs
out of battery power before the data is
saved, data is lost.

Setup
> To access the Run Up/Coast Down Setup screen:
• From the Run Up/Coast Down menu, press 2
or move the pointer bar to 2:Setup and press
< ENTER> . The Setup screen displays (Fig-
ure 4 - 66).
rucd-set.pcx

Figure 4 - 66.
A Run Up/Coast Down Setup Screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 105

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

The following parameters may be set up using the Setup

menu.

ID - Enter up to 20 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Desc).

¾ Together, the ID and Description identify

the run up/coast down job.

Desc - Enter up to 32 characters and press < ENTER> .

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Type).

Type - The type of measurement (accelerations, velocity,

displacement, envelope). Press MENU to view the
choices.
• Select your choice for Type of measurement
with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .
The pointer bar advances to the next field on the
screen (Full scale).

¾ If you selected ENV Acc, two additional

fields display named Env Filter and Num-
ber of Orders.

Env Filter - Press MENU to view the choices.

5 Hz - 100 Hz
50 Hz - 1 kHz
500 Hz - 10 kHz
5 kHz - 40 kHz
• Select your choice of filter range and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Number of Orders).

4 - 106 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

Number of Orders - (env. acc. POINTs only) - Allows

the operator to monitor magnitude at a frequency
other than 1X speed, which is default for Run
up/Coast Down applications. This is useful when
monitoring bearing fault frequency amplitudes during
RU/CD operations.
• Enter the desired frequency as a multiple of run-
ning speed (maximum = 50X speed).

¾ When applied, the RU/CD data collection

screen displays 1XSpeed Mag/Phase, even
though displayed values relate to the fre-
quency specified in the Number of Orders
field described above.
• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Full scale).

Full scale - The units for this field were automatically de-
termined when you selected Type.
• Enter a numerical full scale value and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field on the screen (Detection).

Detection - Press MENU to view the choices.

¾ Refer to the table on page 2-10 for a list-

ing of the Microlog’s methods of signal
detection and scaling for overall dynamic
measurements.
• Select one of the three methods (Peak, RMS,
or Pk to Pk) for detecting the dynamic signal
and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field on the screen (Input).

Input - Enter the transducer sensitivity in millivolts (mv)

per Engineering Unit (EU) and press < ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 107

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

The pointer bar advances to the next field on the

screen (Trigger Slope).

Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select plus or minus with the pointer bar to de-
termine whether the trigger occurs on a rising
or descending signal.
• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Mode).

Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

In Run-up mode, the target machine is initially
stopped, or running at a very low speed. The applica-
tion starts to record data when the speed has in-
creased above the Low Speed and terminates when
the current speed is greater than the High Speed.
In Coast-down mode, the target machine is initially
running at full speed. The application starts to re-
cord data when the speed has decreased below the
High Speed and terminates when the current speed is
less than the Low Speed.
• Select Run Up or Coast Down with the pointer
bar.
• Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field on the screen (Low Speed).

Low Speed - Enter the low speed limit of the interested

speed range. Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar
advances to the next field on the screen (High Speed).

High Speed - Enter the high speed limit of the interested

speed range. Press < ENTER> . The pointer bar
advances to the next field on the screen (Delta speed
calc).
Delta speed calc - Press MENU to view the choices.

4 - 108 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

Equal Interval - Divide the Start and Stop Speeds

into equal 100 speed intervals. This ensures the entire
speed range is covered. The total number of data re-
cords taken for a job may be less than 100 if the Mi-
crolog is not able to catch up with the speed change.
1% previous speed - The new speed interval is 1 %
of the previous speed. This method ensures more
measurements are collected at the lower speed range,
which may help to better define a critical. If the ma-
chine’s speed changes very slowly at low speed, the
100 data records are not able to cover the entire
speed range.
• Select your choice for Delta speed calc and
press < ENTER> .
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Run
Up/Coast Down menu.

Review Data
> To review a Run Up/Coast Down saved job:
• From the Run Up/Coast Down menu, press 3
or move the pointer bar to 3:Review Data and
press < ENTER> . The Review Data screen
(Figure 4 - 67) displays a list of job IDs saved in
permanent memory (in chronological order).

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 109

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

joblist.pcx

Figure 4 - 67.
The Review Data Selection Screen.

¾ If there are no jobs saved in permanent

memory, the following message displays.

No Run Up/Coast Down job in memory.

Press any key to return to the Run-

up/Coast Down menu.

¾ To delete a job from permanent memory,

move the pointer bar to the desired job
and press DELETE.

• Use the UP/DOWN CURSOR to move the

pointer bar to the job for review and press
< ENTER> . The Review Data screen dis-
plays (Figure 4 - 68) for the selected job.

4 - 110 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

rev-dat.pcx

Figure 4 - 68.
The Run Up/Coast Down Review Data Screen.

When reviewing a selected job’s data records, the recorded

data is displayed in table format for inspection. The first
four lines on the screen show the job ID, job Description,
TIME and DATE stamps when the data was collected. If
the Operator ID is turned on and the data was collected
with Operator ID, the fifth line displays the Operator ID;
otherwise, if the data was collected without Operator ID,
the fifth line displays "No Operator ID."

¾ The fifth line is blank if the Operator ID

is turned off.
The sixth line displays column headings. The seventh line
displays column units. The Speed column unit is CPM or
Hz (depending on the current system setup). The Mag col-
umn unit is data type dependent. It can be displayed in
English or Metric units (depending on the current system
setup). The next 16 lines are for display the data table.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 111

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

The table can be either scrolled by line using the UP AR-

ROW or DOWN ARROW keys or by 16 line-page using
the PGUP or PGDN keys.
When the Review Data screen is visible on the Microlog,
you may press the MENU key to access several options (re-
fer to Figure 4 - 64).
• To make a selection, press its number on the Mi-
crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to your
selection and press < ENTER> .

¾ For experienced operators, shortcut keys

are available to access each of the items in
the option menu.
The options on the screen are:
1:Data table (shortcut key F1) - Displays the data for the
selected job in the table format as described above
2:Bode plot (shortcut key F2) - Displays the data for the
selected job in dual graph display (refer to Figure 4 - 53),
Mag vs Speed and Phase vs Speed. For ENV Acc
POINTs, only the Mag vs Speed graph displays, and the
Pha field at the top of the screen is eliminated.
The cross hair cursors simultaneously move across
both graphs as the LEFT CURSOR or the RIGHT
CURSOR key is pressed. The cursors only stop at
the actual data records (no interpolation). The speed,
magnitude, phase and Q values at the current location
display at the top of the screen. The MODE field in-
dicates whether the current job in run up or coast
down.
RU = Run Up
CD = Coast Down
The Phase display’s Y scale is continuous and may
range multiple cycles.

4 - 112 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

¾ Press < ESCAPE> at any time while re-

viewing data to return to the Job list
screen.
3:Polar plot (shortcut key F3) - Displays the data for
the selected job in polar form (refer to Figure 4 - 54).
The cross hair cursor traces along the graph as the
LEFT CURSOR or RIGHT CURSOR key is
pressed. The cursors only stop at the actual data
points with no interpolation. The speed, magnitude,
phase and Q values at the current location display on
top of the screen. The MODE field indicates whether
the current job in run up or coast down.
RU = Run Up
CD = Coast Down
The current x and y coordinates display below the
graph. The option menu can be accessed by pressing
the MENU key to return to data table or to perform
other functions.
4:Save new data - Has no function, since the data has al-
ready been saved.
5:Print - Prints the data as displayed on the screen (in ta-
ble format or graphic format).

¾ The Microlog is compatible with either a

dot matrix or laser printer.
If the Microlog detects no printer connection, the follow-
ing message appears:
PRINTER CONNECTOR NEEDED
While the Microlog is printing, the following message ap-
pears on screen:
PRINTING REPORT

Print Table Report

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 113

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

report1.pcx

Figure 4 - 69.
An Example of a Run Up/Coast Down Table Report.

Fields on a table report are:

SERIAL No - The Microlog unit serial number.

ID - Identifies the job for the collected data.

4 - 114 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

Desc - A brief job description.

TIME - The time the data was collected.

DATE - The date the data was collected.

Operator ID - Printed only if the data was collected with

Operator ID active and a list of Operator ID is avail-
able in the Microlog at the time the report was
printed.

Setup Parameters - The following information is deter-

mined by the values entered in the Setup menu.
• Start Speed
• Stop Speed
• Type
• Trigger Slope
• Delta speed calc
• Phase Type
• Detection
• Env Filter
• Number of Orders
• Mode

¾ The last two fields (Env Filter and Num-

ber of Orders) are available only if Type
is set to Env Acc.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 115

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Run Up/Coast Down

Print Graph Report

report2.pcx

Figure 4 - 70.
An Example of a Print Graph Report.

4 - 116 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Configuration Wizard

The printed information is identical to the print table re-

port except the data is presented in Bode or Polar plots.
For the ENV Acc point type, only the Mag vs Speed
graph is printed.

Configuration Wizard
The Configuration Wizard allows the operator is save up
to 6 operator defined preset Application configurations.
Each ConfigurationWizard option may be customized
and stored for application specific configuration.
Each of the 6 preset configurations can save one set of the
following Microlog setups:
Communication Setup (including modem setup)
System Setup
Route Setup
Analyzer\Input
Analyzer\Spectrum
Analyzer\Trigger
Tracking Filter Setup
Cycic Analysis Setup
Motor Current Setup
Bump Test Setup
The following Micolog configurations cannot be saved:
RunUp\CoastDown Setup
Balancing Setup
Operator ID Enable\Disable
Nonroute Setups for
Process
HFD
Running Speed
Report Control for printing

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 117

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Configuration Wizard

> To access the Configuration Wizard menu:

• From the Applications menu press 8 or move
the pointer bar to 8:Configuration Wizard and
press < ENTER> . The Configuration Wiz-
ard menu displays (Figure 4-71).

¾ When a new Microlog is received from

the factory, all 6 Configuration Wizards
are labeled DEFAULT.
configw iz.bmp

Figure 4 - 71.
The Configuration Wizard Screen.

• Select the desired configuration and press < EN-

TER> , an Options menu displays (Figure 4-
72).

4 - 118 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Configuration Wizard

confw iz2.pcx

Figure 4 - 72.
The Configuration Wizard Options Menu.

Configuration Wizard Options are:

1:Recall - Sets the Microlog’s current configuration to the
settings specified by the selected stored configuration.

> To recall a configuration:

• Highlight the desired configuration and press
< ENTER> .
• From the Options menu, press 1. The preset
configuration is now active.
2:Store - Saves the current configuration to the selected
configuration.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 119

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Configuration Wizard

> To store the current configuration to a preset configura-

tion:
Before accessing the Configuration Wizard application, de-
fine all desired set up parameters in their corresponding
Setup dialogs.
• After all settings are defined, from the Applica-
tions menu press 8 or move the pointer bar to
8:Configuration Wizard and press < EN-
TER> . The Configuration Wizard screen dis-
plays (see Figure 4-71).
• Move the pointer bar to the desired preset con-
figuration and press < ENTER> . The Op-
tions menu displays (see Figure 4-72).
• From the Options menu, press 2:Store, a
screen displays prompting for confirmation (Fig-
ure 4-73).
confw iz3.pcx

Figure 4 - 73.
The Confirmation Message.

4 - 120 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Applications Menu
Configuration Wizard

¾ Press < ESCAPE> to abort the storing

process.
• Press < ENTER> to continue the storing proc-
ess. The Setup information displays (Figure 4-
74).
confw iz4.pcx

Figure 4 - 74.
The Configuration Wizard Setup Screen.

Setup screen parameters are:

Preset Name - Enter a unique name identifying the stored
configuration.
Last Modified - The new configuration is automatically
date and time stamped using the system clock.
Modified by - Enter the user’s name who modified the
configuration.

CMVA60 Microlog 4 - 121

User Manual change 01
The Applications Menu
Configuration Wizard

• Press < ESCAPE> to begin the storing proc-

ess. The following message displays.
Please wait...
Wizard is saving Configuration.
When the storing process is complete, the following mes-
sage displays.
Configuration is successfully saved.

3:Print - Prints the selected Preset Configuration to an at-

tached printer. The preset configuration does not have to
be recalled to print.

4 - 122 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 4-6-92 1:45 S. G.

5
The Analyzer Menu

The Analyzer Function

Small size, light weight, and large graphic display com-
bine to make the CMVA60 Microlog collector a powerful,
exceptionally versatile analyzer capable of viewing the
spectral content of complex dynamic vibration signals as
well as their time domain waveform. The Analyzer func-
tion is intended for field troubleshooting and searching for
specific dynamic characteristics and frequency compo-
nents on complex machinery, such as bladed turbines and
compressors.
Spectra can be stored from the Analyzer function for later
transfer into the host data base.
When in the Analyzer display, commonly used functions
such as Freeze, Save, Markers On, and Zoom are actu-
ated using function keys on the keypad.

Setup
To simplify the setup procedure, two Analyzer user modes
are available, Analysis and Normal. These modes are se-
lected from the System Setup menu in the 8:Utilities func-
tion (see the Utilities chapter).
User Mode: Analysis provides access to all Analyzer
functions.

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 1
User Manual
The Analyzer Menu
Setup

User Mode: Normal simplifies Analyzer operation

by hiding option values for a number of options used
primarily for highly specialized analyses.

¾ For the purposes of the following discus-

sion, the Microlog is assumed to be set to
User Mode:Analysis with all functions
visible and fully operational.

> To access the Analyzer function:

• At the Main menu, press 5 or move the pointer
bar to 5:Analyzer and press < ENTER> . The
Analyzer menu displays (Figure 5 - 1).
screen12.pcx

Figure 5 - 1.
The CMVA60 Microlog Analyzer Menu.

5 - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Analyzer Menu
Collecting Dynamic Data

¾
boxtext

The functions of each of the setup menus are described

in detail in the NonRoute chapter. Refer to that chap-
ter for guidance in setting Microlog up for Analyzer
data collection, then proceed to the next page.

Collecting Dynamic Data

When you have completed the Analyzer setup, select the
Analyzer menu’s 1:Take Data option.

¾ Alarm levels for alarm 1 and alarm 2 in

NonRoute and Analyzer modes are set in-
ternally by the Microlog to 40% and 70%
of full scale.
The Microlog does not allow dynamic data to be collected
during overload state. It reports input signals too large for
the display with an OVERLOADED SIGNAL banner on
the screen, and with the overload indicator (OV) in the cen-
ter of the status line (top line) of the display. If a signal
overload is indicated, increase the full scale amplitude
range. As described in the NonRoute chapter, during data
collection the full scale amplitude range may be increased
or decreased from the Analyzer display by using the up
and down arrow keys.
Depending on how you set Average Mode in Spectrum
Setup, the FFT may continue to average beyond the cho-
sen number of averages (Average Mode:Continuous), it
may stop averaging and freeze the display (Average
Mode:Finite), or it may repeat the entire averaging proc-
ess to the chosen number of averages (Average Mode:Re-
peat).
With this flexibility the Microlog collector may be used to
view an instantaneous time domain waveform or FFT in

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 3
User Manual
The Analyzer Menu
Using the Function Keys

real time; view an averaged spectrum as it is collected; col-

lect, average, and freeze a spectrum; or view a repeated
spectrum.
The controllable cursor is moved right and left with the
right and left arrow keys to display frequency, magnitude,
phase, and order of any spectral component. Markers, de-
fined on the Marker Setup menu, may be turned on and
off with the MKRS ON/OFF function key.

¾ When taking data using the Analyzer

menu, the fmax may be doubled by press-
ing PageUp key or cut in half by pressing
the Page Down key.

Using the Function Keys

The dedicated function keys are active and may be used in
Analyzer when desired. The name of each key is fol-
lowed by a letter in parentheses. When a function key
function is activated, this letter displays on the right side
of the screen’s status line.

¾ Refer to pages 2 - 33 and 2 - 34 for de-

scription of Functions Keys:

FREEZE ON/OFF MKRS ON/OFF

¾ F2 - With MKRS OFF, F2 causes the

cursor to jump to the highest peak in the
vicinity of the cursor. With MKRS ON,
F2 causes the cursor to jump to the next
marker.

5 - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Analyzer Menu
Using the Function Keys

Marker Mode:Cursor Lock

¾ Refer to pages 2 - 34 through 2 - 36 for

Marker Mode:Cursor Lock - Marker
Type functions.

Harmonic Relative
Sideband

¾ When Marker Mode:Cursor Lock is ac-

tive, the SHIFT key is locked ON when
the symbol displays in the middle of
the top line of your screen.

With the SHIFT key locked ON, the har-

monic 1X frequency is shifted one FFT
bin sequence with each arrow key depres-
sion.

Marker Mode:Fixed Freq

¾ Refer to pages 2 -36 and 2 - 37 for

Marker Mode:Fixed Freq - Marker
Type functions.

Harmonic Relative
Sideband DISPLY EXPAND

SAVE

> To assign an ID to a dynamic data display and store the

data:
• Press the SAVE key, a 20-character window dis-
plays.
• Enter the ID or IDs in the window.

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 5
User Manual
The Analyzer Menu
Using the Function Keys

• When the IDs have been specified, press

< ENTER> to store the display.

ZOOM IN (Z): Zooms in on the FFT spectrum in the fre-

quency domain (time domain displays are not affected
by ZOOM) to provide more frequency resolution be-
tween lines. The Microlog takes the frequency at the
cursor position and progressively divides the fre-
quency range by half each time you press the ZOOM
IN key. The lines resolution across the zoomed fre-
quency range remains approximately constant.
Example: Suppose the current frequency range is
from 0 to 60000 CPM with 400 lines resolution and
the cursor is at 12000 CPM.
When you press ZOOM IN, the new frequency range
is 30000 CPM with 400 lines resolution and the cur-
sor will still be at 12000 CPM.
Press ZOOM IN again to produce a new frequency
range of 15000 CPM with the cursor still at 12000
CPM.

¾ Although the Microlog displays only a

portion of the increased resolution spec-
trum in ZOOM, the full frequency range
is available at the same resolution in the
segment being displayed and can be exam-
ined (panned) by moving the cursor be-
yond the end of the visible frequency
range with the left arrow or right arrow
keys. Panning moves the viewing window
to the right or left of the frequency range.

ZOOM OUT: Reverses ZOOM IN.

5 - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Analyzer Menu
Phase Measurements

¾ Refer to pages 2 -38 through 2 - 40 for

description of Marker Mode:Fixed Freq
- Marker Type functions.

RESET MEASMT F1/F2

1XRPM LIN/LOG

PGUP - During data collection, press PGUP to double

the maximum frequency.

PGDN - During data collection, press PGDN to cut the

maximum frequency in half.

Phase Measurements
A phase measurement can be made in Analyzer mode be-
tween the vibration measurement and an external phase ref-
erence (such as the CMSS6165 StrobeLite, the
CMSS6155 Optical Phase Reference, or the CMSS6195
Laser Phase Reference) connected into the Microlog
through the Model 6135D Phase Reference Adapter.
Phase measurements are made by selecting Trigger in the
Trigger Mode field on the Trigger Setup menu followed
by the appropriate selections for the trigger input signals.
Reference this manual’s Applications section for specific
setup routines.

CMVA60 Microlog 5 - 7
User Manual
The Analyzer Menu
Phase Measurements

(This page intentionally blank)

5 - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 3-6-91 10:55 S.G.

6
The Review Menu

Review allows you to view all of your saved data measure-

ments. When you examine saved data in Review, you have
the option to add a note to a measurement POINT, or to
delete a POINT’s data if it is not adequate and must be re-
collected. Review’s operation is similar to that of Route’s
except that measurements are viewed instead of collected.
Some functions that are NOT available in Review are
Make Reading, Manual Read, Zoom, Reset Measmt,
and Save.

How To Use the Review Function

> To access the Review function:
• At the Main menu, press 6 move the pointer bar
to 6:Review and press < ENTER> . A screen
similar to that in Figure 6 - 1 displays.

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 1
User Manual
The Review Menu

ch10-08.pcx

Figure 6 - 1. A ROUTE Hierarchy.

• Move the pointer bar to the prime SET (Point

Summary DB.1) and press < ENTER> , the
next line in the prime SET appears as in Figure
6 - 2.

6 - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Review Menu

ch10-10.pcx

Figure 6 - 2.
A Subset of the Point Summary DB.1 Prime SET.

• Press < ENTER> , when a POINT is encoun-

tered, you view a display of the data stored in
the Microlog (Figure 6 - 3).

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 3
User Manual
The Review Menu

test.pcx

type of
data
stored

alarm
marker

Figure 6 - 3.
Reviewing Data in a Dynamic Data Point Screen.

Letters corresponding to data stored are:

O Overall Value
S FFT Spectrum
N Notes
P Phase
T Time Domain

• Press < ENTER> again to display a spectrum

collection screen (Figure 6 - 4).

6 - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Review Menu

screen07.pcx

amplitude at
cursor position

Figure 6 - 4.
Reviewing a Spectrum Collection Screen.

If Spectral Bands were defined, the screen dis-

plays the bands on the spectrum. Peak values and
setpoints appear as dotted lines while Overall val-
ues and setpoints appear as solid lines.
• Use the PgDn key to view a Spectral Banding
Information summary screen.
Information on this screen includes:

From (CPM) - The spectral band’s low frequency limit in

CPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

To (CPM) - The spectral band’s high frequency limit in

CPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Dan - The spectral band’s peak danger level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 5
User Manual
The Review Menu

Pk Wrn - The spectral band’s peak alert level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Dan - The spectral band’s overall danger level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Wrn - The spectral band’s overall alert level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Band Pk - The spectral band’s current highest peak level.

Updated for every new FFT data buffer.

Band Ov - The spectral band’s current overall level. Cal-

culated using the following equation:


√ high

∑ (Fi ) 2
i = low
OA =
√
 
NBF
Where:
OA = overall level of vibration
low = index of the band’s first FFT line
high = index of the band’s last FFT line
Fi = amplitude of each of the FFT lines
NBF = noise bandwidth for window chosen
Noise Bandwidth:
Chosen Window NBF
Uniform 1.0
Flat Top 3.782893
Hanning 1.499512

6 - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Review Menu

Status - Displays alarm status as follows:

OvD - Overall danger. Shown when the overall level
> = the overall danger limit.
PkD - Peak danger. Shown when the peak level > =
the peak danger limit.
OvA - Overall alert. Shown when the overall level
> = the overall alert limit.
PkA - Peak alert. Shown when the peak level
> = the peak alert limit.
OK - No Alarms.

• Use the right or left arrow keys to view informa-

tion for more than two bands.
Pressing < ENTER> again redisplays the Dynamic
Data Point screen with the current overall value
(THIS) displayed for visual comparison with LAST.
Alarms may be observed (ALARM1, ALARM2, or
both). Alarm markers are hollow if not exceeded,
solid if exceeded.

• Press < ENTER> again to display the data pre-

viously stored for the next POINT.

> To access the Dynamic Data Point screen’s Options:

• Press the MENU key, the Options menu dis-
plays.
• Make selections by positioning the pointer bar
with the up and down arrow keys and by press-
ing < ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog 6 - 7
User Manual
The Review Menu

Options are:
1:Skip Machine 5:User Note
2:Skip Point 6:View Setup
3:Previous Point 7:Delete Data
4:Coded Notes

¾ Refer to pages 1 - 9 and 1 - 11 for descrip-

tions of Options menu choices.

6 - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 3-9-92 7:30 S.G.

7
The Reports Menu

The Microlog can print reports and graphics directly to an

IBM graphics compatible printer. A Model CMSS6160
Printer Adapter plugged into the Microlog’s interface con-
nector is required (Figure 7 - 1).
dani2.sld

Model CMSS6160
Printer Adapter

Printer

Microlog

Figure 7 - 1. Connecting the Microlog To a Printer.

¾ The printer adapter must be used. Con-

necting a printer directly to the Microlog
may damage the printer and/or the
Microlog.
The Reports function consists of three screens: the Re-
ports menu, a Report Controls screen, and a Route List
screen.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 1
User Manual
The Reports Menu
The Reports Menu

The Reports Menu

> To access the Reports menu:
• At the Microlog’s main menu (Figure 7 - 2),
move the pointer bar to Reports and press
< ENTER> .
screen20.pcx

Figure 7 - 2.
The Main Menu.

¾ Before selecting a report from the Re-

ports menu, you must open the SETs and
POINTs which are to appear in the re-
port. See the section F1-Route List later
in this chapter.

• At the Reports menu (Figure 7 - 3), press a nu-

meral on the Microlog’s keypad or move the
pointer bar to your selection and press
< ENTER> ; the report prints.

7 - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
The Report Controls Menu

ch11-02.pcx

Figure 7 - 3. The Reports Menu.

The Report Controls Menu

> To access the Reports Controls menu:
• At the Reports menu, press 8 or move pointer
bar to R8:eports Controls and press < EN-
TER> . The Reports Controls screen appears
(Figure 7 - 4).

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 3
User Manual
The Reports Menu
The Report Controls Menu
alpha mode
726.pcx

Figure 7 - 4.
The Report Controls Data Entry Field in Alpha Mode.

Report Controls fields are:

Printer Type - Press MENU to view choices. Select the

appropriate printer (Dot Matrix or HP Laser). Press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar moves to the next
field (Report Header).

¾ When disconnecting the Microlog from a

HP Laser printer, the printer displays er-
ror 22 message. Resetting the printer re-
solves this problem.

Report Header - When the Report Controls screen first

displays, the Microlog is in unshifted mode.

7 - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
F1 - Route List/F2 - Print

• Press the SHIFT key to place the Microlog in

shifted (alpha) mode before typing the report
header text. The arrow in the top status line in-
dicates when you are in shifted (alpha) mode.
• Use the keyboard to enter a header line of up to
40 characters.

Threshold - A second field sets the FFT alarm thresh-

old—in percent full scale—that causes peaks above
the threshold to be reported.

• Enter the alarm threshold.

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the main menu
screen.

F1 - Route List/F2 - Print

Only POINTs that are in open SETs are included in
graphic and numeric reports.

> To open SETs to print:

• Press F1 - Route List at the Reports menu (see
Figure 7 - 3). The Route List displays (Figure
7 - 5).

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 5
User Manual
The Reports Menu
F1 - Route List/F2 - Print

ch11-10.pcx

Figure 7 - 5. A Route List.

All Route List functions (as described in the chapters

on Route, NonRoute, and Analyzer) are available at
this time, except the Take Data function.

• Move the pointer bar to the desired SET and

press the right arrow key to open the SET.
At this time a Dynamic Points Report for one
POINT can be printed.

• Move the pointer bar to a POINT in the Route

List and press F2 to print.
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Reports
menu.

7 - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

Sample Report Formats

Exceptions Report
Figure 7 - 6 shows what an Exceptions Report looks like.
An Exceptions Report lists all POINTs which exceed
their alarm thresholds. (Alarm thresholds are set in the
PRISM host software, not in the Report Controls/Thresh-
old:.)

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 7
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

ch11-13a.pcx

Figure 7 - 6.
An Exceptions Report.

7 - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

The fields in the Exceptions Report are:

ID - Identifies the POINT where a measurement was re-

corded.

Date - Date the measurement was recorded.

Units - Unit of measurement (English: IPS, Gs, MILS,

Volts. Metric: µM, mm/sec).

Value - Overall value of the measurement.

Alarm1 - Lower alarm level.

Alarm2 - Upper alarm level.

Alrm - shows which alarm is exceeded (A1 and/or A2).

End of Shift Report

Figure 7 - 7 shows what an End of Shift Report looks
like. This report lists all data collected since the last time
the Microlog was initialized.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 9
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

ch11-14.pcx

Figure 7 - 7.
An End of Shift Report.

7 - 10 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

The fields in the End of Shift Report are:

¾ Refer to pages 7 - 8 for description of

End of Shift Report fields:
ID Units
Value

Description - A brief description of the identified POINT.

Status - Indicates the type of data stored. Letters corre-

sponding to stored data are:
O Overall Value
S FFT Spectrum
N Notes
P Phase
T Time Domain

Missed Points Report

Figure 7 - 8 shows what a Missed Points Report looks
like. This report lists the POINTs in a ROUTE for which
data has not yet been collected.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 11
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

ch11-15.pcx

Figure 7 - 8. A Printed Missed Points Report.

The fields in the Missed Points Report are:

¾ Refer to page 7-9 for descriptions of

Missed Points Report fields:
ID Alarm1
Description Alarm2

Last - Overall value of the previous measurement.

Dynamic Points Report

Figure 7 - 9 shows what the FFT spectrum report for a
POINT looks like. FFT spectrums can graph amplitude
(magnitude), phase, and time.

7 - 12 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

rpt4.pcx

Figure 7 - 9.
A Printed FFT Spectrum Report.

The fields in the Dynamic Points Report are:

ID - Identifies the POINT where a measurement was re-

corded.

Description - A brief description of the POINT identified.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 13
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

Full Scale - The maximum value for the spectrum’s ampli-

tude scale.

Type - Acc, Vel, Disp, Pressure, Volts, Pressure.

Det - Method of detection (peak, RMS, or Pk to Pk).

Low Fq Lmt - The high pass filter frequency applied to

the input signal for the purpose of eliminating un-
wanted low frequency noise. Same as Low Freq.
Cutoff.

RPM - The nominal running speed of the machine from

which data was acquired.

Input Sens - Millivolts per engineering unit for the meas-

urement pickup.

Alarm Type - Level, in window, out of window.

Alarm1 - Lower alarm level.

Alarm2 - Upper alarm level.

Freq Range - Range of the spectrum’s frequency scale.

Window - The type of window used in the FFT process-

ing.
Date - Date and time data was collected.

Avg - The number of averages which were collected in the

sample.

Lines - Determines the basic resolution of the spectrum.

7 - 14 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

¾ An additional field (Average Type) is in-

cluded for the Microlog. This field dis-
plays the type of averaging the Microlog
was set to while data was collected.

Dynamic Points Report Including Spectral

Banding Information
The Microlog allows printing of Spectral Bands. This re-
port prints the same information as a Dynamic Points Re-
port with spectral bands displayed. A second page is
printed containing a Spectral Banding Summary. This
summary displays the following information for each spec-
tral band setup:

From (CPM) - The spectral band’s low frequency limit in

CPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

To (CPM) - The spectral band’s high frequency limit in

CPM. Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Dan - The spectral band’s peak danger level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Pk Wrn - The spectral band’s peak alert level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Dan - The spectral band’s overall danger level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Ov Wrn - The spectral band’s overall alert level (alarm

limit). Set in the PRISM host software.

Band Pk - The spectral bands current highest peak level.

Updated for every new FFT data buffer.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 15
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

Band Ov - The spectral band’s current overall level. Cal-

culated using the following equation:


√ high

∑ (Fi ) 2
i = low
OA =
√
 
NBF
Where:
OA = overall level of vibration
low = index of the band’s first FFT line
high = index of the band’s last FFT line
Fi = amplitude of each of the FFT lines
NBF = noise bandwidth for window chosen
Noise Bandwidth:
Chosen Window NBF
Uniform 1.0
Flat Top 3.782893
Hanning 1.499512

Status - Displays alarm status as follows:

OvD - Overall danger. Shown when the overall level > =

the overall danger limit.

PkD - Peak danger. Shown when the peak level > = the
peak danger limit.

OvA - Overall alert. Shown when the overall level > =

the overall alert limit.

PkA - Peak alert. Shown when the peak level > = the
peak alert limit.

7 - 16 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

At the bottom of the spectrum report in Figure 7 - 9 are

two tables. The first table, IDENTIFICATION OF
SPECTRAL PEAKS ABOVE 0.012 IPS contains the fol-
lowing fields:

¾ 0.012 is 2.5% of 0.5 (full scale). The

2.5% is set in the Threshold field in the
Report Controls screen.

NO. - Number of peaks listed. Up to a maximum of 16

values.

AMP. - The amplitude at a peak.

DEG. - Number of degrees from the trigger.

FREQ. - Frequency of peaks above Threshold (0.012 in

our example).

ORDER - Number of times running speed.

The second table, SPECTRAL ENERGY SUMMARY,

contains the following fields:

OVERALL - RMS summation of the spectral band.

SYNC (synchronous) - RMS summation of running speed

and all integral multiples of running speed.

SUBSYNC (subsynchronous) - RMS summation of all

components below the first order.

NONSYNC (nonsynchronous) - RMS summation of all

non-integer order components above the first order.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 17
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

Dynamic Points Report Including Phase Spec-

trum
Phase Spectrum - Figure 7 - 10 shows an example of the
phase spectrum position of a Dynamic Points Report. A
phase spectrum graphs phase vs. frequency (or orders).
The fields on the page containing the phase graph are the
same as the fields on the page containing the FFT graph.

¾ If your graph runs outside its display win-

dow, set Auto Range:On in the Data Col-
lection menu (see Chapter 8, Utilities)
and re-print the report.

¾ Phase data is obtained by positioning the

cursor at the rotational speed or its har-
monics, and not at the peak components.
rpt5.pcx

Figure 7 - 10. A Phase Spectrum Graph.

7 - 18 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

Dynamic Points Report Including FAM Data

Summary
The Microlog allows printing FAM information. This re-
port prints the same information as a Dynamic Points Re-
port. A second page is printed containing a FAM DATA
SUMMARY (Figure 7 - 11).
fam-3.pcx

Figure 7 - 11. The FAM DATA SUMMARY.

This summary displays FAM information as defined in

PRISM4.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 19
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

Database Setup Report

Figure 7 - 12 shows the appearance of the Database Setup
Report.
ch11-18.pcx

Figure 7 - 12. A Database Setup Report.

7 - 20 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

The report lists each POINT in a SET or ROUTE and the

POINT’s setup data. See the Dynamic Points Report
(above) for a description of the fields included in this re-
port.

The Notes Report

Figure 7 - 12 shows what the Notes Report looks like.
ch11-20.pcx

Figure 7 - 13. A Notes Report.

CMVA60 Microlog 7 - 21
User Manual
The Reports Menu
Sample Report Formats

The Notes Report lists each POINT for which a note was
entered at data collection time, and the note itself. This re-
port has the same fields as the End of Shift Report.

Print Test
Figure 7 - 14 shows the output of the print test.
ch11-21.pcx

Figure 7 - 14. A Print Test Report.

This report is a test of the capabilities of the printer at-

tached to your Microlog.

7 - 22 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 4-7-92 7:20 S.G

8
The Utilities Menu

The Utilities menu (see Figure 8 - 1) permits assignment

of global measurement and communications parameters
for the Microlog. It also allows you to perform housekeep-
ing and test functions.
801.pcx

Figure 8 - 1.
The CMVA60 Microlog Utilities Menu.

CMVA60 Microlog 8-1

User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Display Contrast

Display Contrast
The Display Contrast function allows you to increase and
decrease contrast of the LCD display screen.

> To access the Display Contrast function:

• In the Utilities menu, press 1 or move the
pointer bar to 1:Display Contrast and press
< ENTER> . The Display Contrast screen
displays (Figure 8 - 2).
ch12-03.pcx

Figure 8 - 2. The Display Contrast Screen.

• Use the arrow keys on the keypad to adjust dis-

play contrast.
The right arrow key increases contrast. The left ar-
row key decreases contrast. Adjust the contrast so it
best suits your viewing angle and light level.

8-2 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Temp/Battery

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilities

menu.

Temp/Battery
This function displays the state of charge on the Microlog
battery and the Microlog’s internal temperature.

> To access the Temp/Battery function:

• In the Utilities menu, press 2 or move the
pointer bar to 2:Temp/Battery and press < EN-
TER> . The Temp/Battery screen displays
(Figures 8-3).
battery.pcx

Figure 8 - 3.
The Microlog’s Temp/Battery Condition Display.

• Check the battery charge on the Battery Condi-

tion meter.

CMVA60 Microlog 8-3

User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Temp/Battery

If the meter reads less than 75% of full charge, you should
consider charging the battery, or replacing the battery pack
in the Microlog with the spare battery pack from the sup-
port module.
The graphic arrows on both the battery condition and oper-
ating temperature displays indicate the values at which
warning indicators are turned on to indicate abnormal con-
ditions. The low battery charge indicator (BT) appears in
the top status line of the screen when battery charge level
declines to the first arrow (approximately 1/3 full scale).
When the lower arrow is reached, the Microlog automat-
ically shuts off to preserve data in memory.
If the Microlog automatically shuts off, you can either re-
charge the internal battery pack or change to the spare bat-
tery pack (all memory is automatically protected for about
3 minutes by a small internal power source while battery
packs are exchanged) and immediately resume operating
the Microlog.
Serial Number - Displays the Microlog’s serial number.
Before leaving the Temp/Battery display, note the elapsed
time indicator (ET= ). When you insert a fully charged
battery, press the F1 key to reset ET to zero. This feature
tracks the hours of battery life between charges.
• When you are satisfied and comfortable with the
battery charge and internal temperature displays,
press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilities
menu.

8-4 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Set Clock

Set Clock
Numeric keypad entries set the time and date.

¾ Alternatively, the PRISM software Trans-

fer menu offers options for easily config-
uring the connected Microlog’s internal
settings.

> To access the Set Clock function:

• In the Utilities menu, press 3 or move the
pointer bar to 3:Set Clock and press
< ENTER> . The Set Clock screen displays
(Figure 8 - 4).

¾ Corrections to the time or date are easily

made using left and right arrow keys to
shift the cursor (flashing space) to the nu-
meral that is to be changed.

CMVA60 Microlog 8-5

User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Set Clock

ch12-06.pcx

Figure 8 - 4. Setting Time and Date.

Set Clock screen fields are:

Time - Enter the correct time with the keypad numerals.

When each field has been filled (hours, minutes, sec-
onds), the cursor jumps to the next field.

Date - Press MENU to view the choices.

Both European date (Day/Month/Year) and American
date (Month/Day/Year) conventions are available.

• Move the pointer bar to your selection and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
date field.
• Enter the desired date with the keypad numer-
als. When each field has been filled (month,
day, year), the cursor jumps to the next field.

8-6 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Communications

• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilities

menu.

Communications
This function establishes the parameters for transferring
data between the Microlog and host computer by direct
connection or by modem. These parameters must be the
same in both the Microlog and host computer software
(such as PRISM host software).

> To access the Communications function:

• In the Utilities menu, press 4 or move the
pointer bar to 4:Communications and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar displays at
Baud.
Communications screen fields are:

Baud - Press MENU to view the choices (Figure 8 - 5).

CMVA60 Microlog 8-7

User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Communications

mlch8-44.pcx

Figure 8 - 5. The Communications Menu.

¾ The baud rate determines the speed of

transmission; 38,400 baud transmits at
38,400 bits per second (bps). Since it
usually takes 10 bits to transmit one char-
acter, 38,400 bps is a transmission rate of
approximately 3,840 characters per sec-
ond.
For serial communications with a host computer with-
out a modem, the recommended baud rate is 38,400,
but this value may be changed in both the Microlog
and host computer.

• Move the pointer bar to the baud rate which

matches that of the host (or the PRISM host soft-
ware) and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar
advances to the next field (Modem Mode).

8-8 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Communications

Modem Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.

None - Used for a direct, hard-wired connection be-
tween the Microlog and host computer.
Originate - Used for modem connection between the
Microlog and host computer, where the Microlog
originates the call by dialing the phone number en-
tered below.
Auto Answer - Used for modem connection between
the Microlog and host computer. To make the con-
nection, the PRISM host software originates the call
and the Microlog automatically answers.

• Select Modem Mode with the pointer bar and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (Phone #).

Microlog Remote - Set to Yes to enable the Microlog to

communicate with PRISM4 Remote software.

Phone # - The Phone # dialing command line consists of

the “ attention” command (AT), the dial command
(D), a dialing modifier: tone (T) or pulse (P), and a
phone number. A sample dial command line is:
ATDT 555-1212

¾ A Hayes modem or Hayes compatible

type modem is recommended. See your
modem user guide for information on
how to use your modem.

• Enter the Phone # dialing command line and

press < ENTER> .

Modem Setup (Optional) - Enter modem specific control

commands.

CMVA60 Microlog 8-9

User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
System Setup

¾ Modem specific control commands are

not recommended, unless absolutely nec-
essary.
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilities
menu screen.

System Setup
The System Setup sets global parameters for units, auto-
matic amplitude range, and sensor power supply.

> To access the System Setup menu:

• In the Utilities menu, press 5 or move the
pointer bar to 5:System Setup and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar appears on the
first field of the System Setup screen (FFT
Hz/CPM).
System Setup screen fields are:

FFT Hz/CPM - Press MENU to view the choices (Figure

8 - 6).

8 - 10 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
System Setup

804.pcx

Figure 8 - 6.
The System Setup Screen.

• Select FFT frequency units with the pointer bar

and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (FFT Lin/Log).

FFT Lin/Log - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select your choice for default display mode and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (System).

System - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select English or Metric units with the pointer
bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (Auto Range). Press
MENU to view the choices.

Auto Range - When Auto Range is on, the Microlog auto-

matically scales the amplitude range to achieve an op-
timum range for the input signal. The full scale

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 11
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
System Setup

amplitude range may be increased manually in multi-

ples of 2 during data collection by pressing the up ar-
row key. Pressing the down arrow key decreases the
full scale amplitude range by multiples of 0.5.

¾ When printing a Dynamic Points Re-

port, if the graph runs outside its display
window, set Auto Range:On in the Sys-
tem Setup menu and re-print the report.
Auto Range:On also autoranges the dis-
plays in Review even if data was collected
with autoranging off.

• Select Auto Range off or on with the pointer

bar and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (User Mode).
User Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.
Normal - In Analyzer mode, this selection reduces
the choices displayed to only those four needed for
routine machinery diagnosis (Figure 8 - 7).

8 - 12 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
System Setup

ch12-27.pcx

Figure 8 - 7.
The Analyzer Menu Which Displays When
User Mode:Normal Is Selected.

Analysis - This selection gives you access to the full

range of seven choices provided in the Microlog (Fig-
ure 8 - 8).

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 13
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
System Setup

ch12-26.pcx

Figure 8 - 8.
The Analyzer menu Which Displays When
User Mode: Analysis Is Selected

¾ In Analysis mode, it is possible to estab-

lish trigger parameters requiring an exter-
nal input, then shift to the Normal mode
where these selections are not visible.
• Select User Mode with the pointer bar and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (Data Storage).
Data Storage - Press MENU to view the choices.
Normal - Data stored in Normal mode retains full 16
bit amplitude resolution.
Compressed - Data stored in Compressed mode en-
ables storing almost twice the data at a slight penalty
in amplitude resolution (no more than 4%, typically
less than 1%).

8 - 14 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
System Setup

• Select Data Storage with the pointer bar and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (Sensor Mode).
Sensor Mode - Press MENU to view the choices.
Normal - Used to maximize battery life. Power to
the signal conditioning circuitry is turned on only
when making an overall or FFT measurement, when
the Battery/Temperature screen is displayed, and
when in Transfer mode.
Always On - Used to keep a sensor with a large
power-on transient and/or a long settling time ener-
gized continuously during a ROUTE. Always On is
recommended when making dynamic measurements
below 5 Hz. Although this takes more battery volt-
age, it shortens the time to take a measurement be-
cause there is no need for settling time.

• Select Sensor Mode with the pointer bar and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (Connector).

Connector - Press MENU to view the choices.

INPUT - Accepts dynamic and process inputs using
off the shelf interfaces such as ultrasonic detectors. It
can be selected in the Utilities/System Setup menu
as either ICP, External, or Charge Amp.
ICP - Selected when a sensor which requires 24
V dc/2.2 mA is attached to the INPUT.

¾ INPUT BNC must be set to the ICP op-

tion to power any sensor connected to the
INPUT BNC (which requires 24 V
dc/2.2 mA).

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 15
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
System Setup

External - Select when taking measurements out

of “ Buffered” outputs like those on permanently
mounted rack systems, process signals, or from a
singal generator.
Charge Amp - Select when a “ Charge Mode”
Accelerometer (pC/g) is attached.

PHASE - Accepts and conditions tachometer inputs such

as; Eddy Probes, laser tachometers, optical tachome-
ters, etc.

OUTPUT - Provides a buffered replica of the input signal

for recording, headphones, or further external signal
processing. It is important to note that depending on
the size of the signal and the gain selected, the output
may be 1/10 the amplitude of the input.

¾ If Connector:BNC is selected, a new

field appears in the System Setup menu.

• Select Connector with the pointer bar and press

< ENTER> . The pointer bar advances to the
next field (Sensor Power).

Sensor Power - This field diplays only if Connector:BNC

is selected. Press MENU to view choices.
• Select Sensor Power with the pointer bar and
press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (Settling Mode).

Settling Mode - Press MENU to view choices.

Off - Data collection is delayed for 2.5 seconds.
Conservative - Performs a detailed scan of the input
for DC offset, to determine whether data is good.
Scanning takes longer with this selection.

8 - 16 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
System Setup

Aggressive - Performs a less detailed scan of the in-

put for DC offset to determine whether data is good.
Scan speed is faster than the above option.
Select Settling Mode and press < ENTER> . The
pointer bar advances to the next field (Sensor/Cable
Check).

Sensor/Cable Check - Press MENU to view the choices.

• Select Yes to have the Microlog automatically
check for a defective sensor or its associated ca-
ble upon unit power-up. During unit power-up,
the Cable/Sensor Status screen displays (Fig-
ure 8- 9).

¾ When conducting the cable/sensor check

on a multi-pin connector, a temporary
adapter (P/N ########) must be used be-
tween the Microlog and the cable/sensor
assembly being tested. This cable/sesnor
adapter is not necessary when checking
the Triax Accelerometer Sensor cable.

¾ Caution: Do not use the cable/sensor

adapter with the temperature gun cable
assembly. Equipment may be damaged.

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 17
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Route Setup

fig8-9.pcx

Figure 8 - 9.
The Cable/Sensor Status Screen.

Verify the BOV condition is correct and press

< ESCAPE> to enter the ROUTE.
The Microlog looks for a voltage range of 8 VDC to 16
VDC as an acceptable bias voltage range.
• Press < ENTER> .
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilities
menu.

Route Setup
The Route Setup menu sets global parameters for
ROUTE collection.

> To access the Route Setup menu:

• In the Utilities menu, press 6 or move the
pointer bar to 6:Route Setup and press
< ENTER> . The pointer bar appears on the

8 - 18 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Route Setup

first field of the Route Setup screen (Route

Mode).
811.pcx

Figure 8 - 10. The Route Setup Screen.

Route Setup screen fields are:

Route Mode - Used to save time during data collection.

Press MENU to view the choices (Figure 8 - 10).
Normal - Pressing < ENTER> when in an FFT
spectrum display during data collection causes the
Microlog to return to the current POINT’s overall
measurement display so you may visually confirm the
data collected and record observation notes. Pressing
< ENTER> a second time advances the Microlog to
the next POINT.
Auto - When set to Auto, pressing the < ENTER>
key from the FFT spectrum display automatically ad-
vances the Microlog to the next measurement POINT
without additional keystrokes. In this mode, notes
should be recorded before the data is collected.

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 19
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Route Setup

• Select Route Mode with the pointer bar and

press < ENTER> . The pointer bar advances
to the next field (Route Spectrum).

Route Spectrum - Used to save time during data collec-

tion. Press MENU to view the choices.
Show - Displays the FFT spectrum during ROUTE
data collection.
Hide - Only the overall bar graph displays. The FFT
spectrum does not display.
In either mode an FFT spectrum is recorded when re-
quired.
• Select Route Spectrum with the pointer bar
and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (Route Trigger Slope).

Route Trigger Slope - Press MENU to view the choices.

When collecting data in a ROUTE which requires a
trigger, you must correctly set this field.
• Select Route Trigger Slope with the pointer bar
and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar ad-
vances to the next field (Route Collection).

Route Collection - Used to save time during data collec-

tion. Press MENU to view the choices.
Normal - The display is updated by each FFT aver-
age.
Fast - Minimizes the time required to collect an aver-
aged FFT spectrum by updating the display only after
the requested number of averages have been calcu-
lated.
• Select Route Collection with the pointer bar
and press < ENTER> . The pointer advances
to the next field on the screen (Average Over-
lap).

8 - 20 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Route Setup

Average Overlap - Overlap processing is advantageous

when the time required to gather a time record is
much longer than the time needed to calculate an
FFT spectrum. In the Microlog this occurs at fre-
quencies below 1,000 Hz (60,000 CPM).
For lower frequencies, the amount of overlap can be
increased to reduce the time required to collect a
given number of averages. Recognize, however, that
the greater the overlap, the more information shared
between averages. Press MENU to view choices.
Max - Uses whatever data is in the time record at the
time. This can be existing data, new data, or a mix-
ture depending on how long it takes to collect time re-
cord data. Results in the shortest averaging time but
may lack statistical accuracy.
75% - Uses 75% of existing data and 25% of new
data to calculate new FFT.
50% - Uses 50% of existing data and 50% of new
data to calculate new FFT.
None - Each spectrum ensemble is new data added to
the sum.
Overlap processing is used to obtain enough new en-
semble data for an accurate average. If the maximum
frequency is low and the FFT process time is fast, the
average sum would include a high percent of old data
with maximum overlap. Below 2 kHz, 50% overlap
and six averages is a reasonable ROUTE setup.
• Select your choice for Average Overlap with
the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .

¾ To enable Operator ID tagging, you

must Clear the Microlog before down-
loading a ROUTE to the Microlog.

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 21
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Route Setup

Operator ID Tagging - A set of 100 (maximum) Operator

Ids and 50 (maximum) Microlog serial numbers may
be downloaded to the Microlog. If set to Yes, each
time the ROUTE screen is entered, the Microlog
diplays the list of downloaded operators. The user se-
lects his or her Operator Id and Microlog serial nu-
mer (which the Microlog uses to tag every data
value).
• Select Yes to tag each data point with an Opera-
tor ID and Microlog Serial Number and press
< ENTER> . The pointer advances to the next
field (Route Display).

Route Display - Press MENU to view choices.

Point Only - Allows the operator to move the pointer
bar from POINT to POINT (bypassing SETs and ma-
chines) within a ROUTE hierarchy list. Press the
Up/Down arrow to move to the next or previous
POINT in the Route display.
Hierarchy - (default) Moves the pointer bar to every
item within a Route hierarchy list.
• Select your choice for Route Display and press
< ENTER> . The pointer advances to the next
field (View MPA Spectrum).

8 - 22 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Memory Test

View MPA Spectrum - Press MENU to view options

(Figure 8-11).
fig8-11.pcx

Figure 8 - 11. The Route Setup Screen.

Select whether to display the MPA ROUTE spectrum for

1st, Last, All, or No POINTs.
The Microlog displays the corresponding spectrum (includ-
ing any FAM or spectral band information) allowing the
operator to inspect and verify that the data is correct.
Press SAVE to continue collecting data for the remaining
MPA POINTs or press < ESCAPE> to cancel data collec-
tion.
• Press < ESCAPE> to return to the Utilities
menu.

¾
Memory Test
When this option is selected, the follow-
ing message displays:
For service mode only

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 23
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Initialize

Initialize
Initialize deletes all ROUTEs, ROUTE POINTs, and Non-
Route POINTs stored within the Microlog. There are three
initialization modes:

Mode 1 - When PROMs are changed, a two-key initializa-

tion must be performed before using the Microlog
again. The two-key initialization is accomplished by
simultaneously holding down both numeral keys 9
and 6 while turning the Microlog on. This process
(called Format) erases all stored data and initializes
the Microlog’s menus, setup screens, and parameters
to factory default settings.

¾ To verify that your Microlog has been in-

itialized properly, here is a technique we
suggest you use.

Before initializing, go to the 8:Utili-

ties/5:System Setup screen and set Auto
Range:On. Initialize as described above
then go back to the 8:Utilities/5:System
Setup screen. If you see Auto
Range:Off, you have successfully initial-
ized.

Mode 2 - The Microlog may also be initialized from the

Utilities menu. This method of initialization erases
data, but does not affect existing screen setups.
• At the Utilities menu, press 8 or move the
pointer bar to 8:Initialize and press
< ENTER> . A PASSWORD pop-up window
appears (Figure 8 - 12).

8 - 24 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 The Utilities Menu
Initialize

ch12-24.pcx

Figure 8 - 12. A Password Pop-Up Window.

• Key in the password and press < ENTER> .

The Microlog erases all POINT data. It also
erases the optional downloadable balancing pro-
gram.

¾ The password may be set using the

4:Communications option in the Utilities
menu.

• Place the pointer bar on Baud and press F2. A

pop-up window appears titled, OLD PASS-
WORD.
• Key in the old password and press
< ENTER> . The window changes to
NEW PASSWORD.
• Key in the new password.

CMVA60 Microlog 8 - 25
User Manual change 01
The Utilities Menu
Flash Utilities

Remember, a two-key initialization erases all POINT

data and initializes all the Microlog’s screen setups to
their default parameters.

Mode 3 - The Microlog may also be initialized from a

menu selection in your PRISM host software in the
host computer. Clear erases all POINTs. Reset
erases all POINT data. Neither Clear nor Reset af-
fects the Microlog’s screen setups.

¾
Flash Utilities
When this option is selected, the follow-
ing message displays:
For service mode only

8 - 26 CMVA60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 3-09-92 8:20 S.G.

Appendix A
Battery Capacity, Care, and
Testing

Changing Batteries
The main battery pack in the Microlog collector can be
changed at any time without the loss of data, however, us-
ers are advised to change batteries following upload or
print-out whenever possible to avoid any problems due to a
low or discharged battery.
A low or failed back-up power source will be observed as
a loss in the date or time and sometimes the substitution of
characters for numerals following a main battery change.
When these symptoms are observed, data and instructions
in memory are likely scrambled or lost.
After a battery change, the date and time should always be
observed for symptoms of a low or failed back-up power
source. If a low or discharged back-up power source is
suspected, reset the Microlog.

> To reset the Microlog:

• Hold down the Microlog’s 9 and 6 key.
• While depressing the 9 and 6 keys, turn the
Microlog on.

¾ Resetting the Microlog deletes all

POINTs.
Consult your local Service Center for repairing the back-
up power.

CMVA60 Microlog A - 1
User Manual
Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing
Battery Life

Battery Life

¾ Battery life is strongly influenced by a va-

riety of factors (for example, temperature,
battery age, sensor type, backlight us-
age,etc.).

¾ SKF Condition Monitoring tests on

CMVA60 units in the ROUTE mode have
recorded battery life in excess of 8 hours
for NiMH batteries. These tests were per-
formed with Sensor Power:Normal,
which is the default and suggested method
of data collection for the CMVA60.

Battery Charging
The CMVA6112 Support Module is designed for use with
NiMH (Nickel/Metal Hydride) Battery Packs
(CMVA50230-1). We recommend the following proce-
dures to obtain the most battery life from your battery.
The CMVA6112 Support Module is capable of charging
two battery packs simultaneously, one in the Support Mod-
ule, and one in the Microlog connected to the Support
Module. To this purpose, the 6112 Support Module fea-
tures two LEDs:

Battery in Charger LED - Indicates the status of the Bat-

tery Pack in the 6112 Support Module.

Battery in Microlog LED - Indicates the status of the Bat-

tery Pack in the Microlog connected to the 6112 Sup-
port Module.

A - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing
Battery Charging

¾ Deep discharging only occurs in the Sup-

port Module. The Microlog cannot deep
discharge its Battery Pack (through the
support module).
Upon receiving your new NiMH Battery Pack, you should
deep discharge and fully re-charge your Battery Pack a
minimum of three times to “ teach” your NiMH Battery
Pack its full charge potential. After deep discharging and
re-charging three times, the NiMH Battery Pack obtains
its maximum battery life and no longer requires deep dis-
charging prior to re-charging (as NiMH batteries do not de-
velop a “ memory").

> To deep discharge, then fully re-charge your NiMH Bat-

tery Pack:
• Place the NiMH Battery Pack in the powered on
6112 Support Module.

¾ It may take 1-2 minutes for the LED to

light, depending on the battery’s residual
charge. If the LED does not light within
5 minutes, the Battery Pack is defective.
• Press the 6112 Support Module’s black Deep
Discharge button. The 6112 Battery in Charger
LED begins a “ slow flash” (1 flash per second)
as the NiMH battery deep discharges.
• When deep discharging is complete, the Battery
in Charger LED stops flashing and assumes a
“ constant on” status (the LED remains lit with-
out flashing). This indicates that the Battery
Pack is fast-charging.
• As the battery nears its full charge capacity, the
LED changes from a “ constant on” status to a
“ fast flash” . This indicates the Battery Pack is
trickle charging.

CMVA60 Microlog A - 3
User Manual
Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing
Battery Charging

If necessary, you may remove the battery when the LED

changes from a “ constant on” to a “ fast flash” . However,
to ensure the battery is charged to its full charge potential,
you should leave the Battery Pack on a trickle charge for at
least two hours before removing the Battery Pack from the
6112 Support Module.
• Perform the deep discharging/re-charging proce-
dure described for the NiMH Battery Pack three
consecutive times.

> To re-charge your NiMH Battery Pack (after 3 deep dis-

charge/re-charges):
• Place the NiMH Battery Pack in the powered on
6112 Support Module or in a Microlog attached
to the powered on Support Module. The appro-
priate LED changes to a “ constant on” status in-
dicating the Battery Pack is fast charging.

¾ It may take 1-2 minutes for the LED to

light, depending on the battery’s residual
charge. If the LED does not light within
5 minutes, the Battery Pack is defective.

¾ If the Battery Pack has a high residual

charge, the appropriate LED may go di-
rectly to a “ fast flash” and skip the “ con-
stant on” status. In this case, the 6112
Support Module has determined that the
Battery Pack only requires a trickle
charge to bring it to full charge capacity.
Allow the Battery Pack to trickle charge
for at least two hours before removing it
from the Support Module.

A - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing
Unintentional Discharge

• As the battery nears its full charge capacity, the

LED changes from a “ constant on” status to a
“ fast flash” . This indicates the Battery Pack is
trickle charging.
• If necessary, you may remove the battery when
the LED changes from a “ constant on” to a
“ fast flash” . However, to ensure the battery is
charged to its full charge potential, you should
leave the Battery Pack on a trickle charge for at
least two hours before removing the Battery
Pack from the 6112 Support Module.

Unintentional Discharge
The 6112 Support Module immediately proceeds to dis-
charge its Battery Pack when power is removed from the
6112. To avoid this inadvertent discharge, remove the Bat-
tery Pack from the Support Module before removing
power from the Support Module.

Aborting Deep Discharge

> To abort a deep discharge:
• Remove the Battery Pack from the 6112 Support
Module, then reinsert the Battery Pack in the
Support Module, or
• Remove power from the 6112 Support Module,
then re-apply power to the Support Module.

CMVA60 Microlog A - 5
User Manual
Battery Capacity, Care, and Testing
Thermal Switch - NiMH Battery Pack

Thermal Switch - NiMH Battery Pack

The NiMH Battery Pack (CMVA50230-1) is equipped
with a Thermal Switch that disables the battery pack at
temperatures exceeding 120o Fahrenheit (49o Celsius).
• Do not operate the Microlog in temperatures ex-
ceeding 120o F (49o C).
• Do not store the Microlog in temperatures ex-
ceeding 120o F (49o C).
• Do not charge the Microlog in temperatures ex-
ceeding 110o F (43o C) (charging increases the
Battery Pack’s internal temperature by approxi-
mately 10o F).

> If the Battery Pack Thermal Switch opens as a result

of excessive temperature:
• Place the Microlog and Battery Pack in a cooler
environment, and wait for the Battery Pack’s in-
ternal temperature to cool.
• Once cooled, insert the Battery Pack in the Mi-
crolog (if necessary) and power on. If the Mi-
crolog powers up normally, the Battery Pack
switch has closed and the Battery Pack/Mi-
crolog are ready for use.

A - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 03-6-92 11:45

Appendix B
Specifications

Specifications for CMVA60

SOURCE Non-Measurement Observations: Added

to measurement as coded notes or in plain
Vibration Sensors: Acceleration (or veloc-
language to a total of 32 characters per
ity), handheld or attached with magnet or
measurement point.
quick connect. Nominal 2.2 mA current
source available from input. Compatible PRE-PROCESSING
with integral electronic piezoelectric acceler-
Hardware Enveloper: With four (4) select-
ometers. Open circuit voltage is + 24 volts
able input filters for enhanced bearing and
nominal.
gearmesh fault detection.
SEE Sensor: CMSS786M SEE sensor 0-
Filter selection: 5 Hz-100 Hz, 50Hz-1,000
250 SEE range.
Hz, 500Hz-10 kHz, 5Hz-40 kHz.
AC/DC Current Sensor:
INPUT PARAMETERS
High Temperature Pressure Sensor:
Tachometer: Minimum pulse amplitude 2
Temperature Sensors: Measurement range volt peak to peak, minimum 0.1 ms pulse
-580° to 2,102° F (-500° to 1,150°C). width, and conditioning circuitry.
From Installed Monitoring System: Accel- Input Impedance: 1 Meg Ohm.
eration, velocity, displacement from noncon-
Input Coupling: Low frequency 3 dB roll
tact probes, speed, phase temperature or
off at 1.0 Hz.
any process parameter.
Keyboard Entry: Measurements read from Input Voltage Range: AC ±25 V peak,
indicators or installed instruments entered DC ±50 V.
in engineering units. Maximum of eight (8)
places including sign (+ or -) and decimal Dynamic Range: 80 dB (14 bit signal con-
point. version) plus 60 dB of gain ranging for a to-
tal signal input range of 140 dB.
Universal Tachometer Input: Accepts
Amplitude: Accuracy within 1% input at
pulse inputs up to ±25 V.
one specified frequency.
AC and DC Volts: From any Source. See
Input Connectors: BNC (3) input, output
Input Voltage Range.
and tachometer/phase. Multi-pin D connec-
tor supports all previous generation Mi-
crolog cables.

CMVA60 Microlog B - 1
User Manual
Specifications
Specifications for CMVA60

Data Displays: Communication: 1200, 2400, 4800,

Single or dual split screen. Magnitude, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115,520
time, and phase. baud rates.
Tracking filter (1X and 2X).
Power: Removable NiMH battery packs -
Amplitude vs. crank angle.
8 hours life.
Motor current analysis (zoomed and envel-
oped). Keyboard: Sealed chemical resistant sili-
Up to 12 bands (fixed or order based). con rubber, tactile touch.
Dedicated Keys For Analysis: Markers
DATA PROCESSING AND STORAGE
on/off, freeze display, zoom in/out, save
Microprocessor: Intel, 32 bit 25 MHz mi- data, display expand, set RPM (running fre-
croprocessor. quency index for orders), reset measure-
ment, LIN/LOG shift cursor.
Memory: 6 Mb (Flash 4 Mb).
Hot Keys: Find peak, find last route point
MEASUREMENT measured, overall and cursor values, and
motor current fault criteria.
Range: 0.5 Hz to 20 kHz (continuously ad-
justable). LCD Screen: One button activated back-
light, 5,000" (127mm) x 4.375 (111mm)
Averaging- Programmable from 1 to 9,999.
with disposable screen guards.
Type: Average, peak hold, synchronous
time, and off. Case: High impact injection molded with
Mode: Continuous, finite, and repeat. IP54 dust and splash rating.
Markers: Fixed and cursor lock. Har- PRINTING
monic, Relative, and Sideband.
Direct to LaserJet or Dot Matrix, 8-1/2" x
Trigger Modes: Amplitude trigger thresh- 11" and A4 metric formats.
olds, trigger slope, and pre- and post-trig-
APPLICATION RESIDENT PRO-
ger time delays are fully programmable.
GRAMS
Free run, external, and input.
Single and Two Plane Balancing.
FFT Analysis:
Tracking Filter: 1X and 2X.
Start Frequency: Preprogrammed between
Motor Current Monitoring: Rotor fault crite-
1 and the maximum frequency.
ria.
Maximum Frequency: Selected between 1
Cyclic Measurement: Amplitude vs. crank
Hz and 20 kHz.
angle (reciprocating) and punch and press
Resolution: Programmable 100, 200, 400,
cycles.
800, 1600, 3200, and 6400 lines.
Frequency Accuracy: 0.01% of the fre- PHYSICAL DATA
quency measured at the position of the dis-
Size: 7.88" (W) x 10.50" (H) x 2.50" (D)
play cursor.
[200mm (W) x 267mm (H) x 64mm (D)]
Measurement Windows: Hanning, Uni-
form, and Flat Top. Weight: 5 pounds (2.3 kg)
Multi-Parameter Route Collection: Up to
12 points can be linked for one button push
automation.

B - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Specifications
Specifications for CMVA60

ENVIRONMENTAL CMSS31476400 Cable Microlog to

CMSS787A Accelerometer
IP Rating: IP64
CMSS60139-04 Stinger Accelerometer Tip
Temperature Range:
4.5 inches
Storage: -10°to 60° C. (14° to 140° F.)
CMSS908-MD Magnetic Base, Accelerome-
Operational: -10° to 50° C. (14° to ter, 1 1/2 inches
122° F.)
CMSSAD-BLANK Stainless Discs (Quick
Humidity: 95% Non-Condensing Disconnect) (10 Discs, 1 pack)
ORDERING INFORMATION 31641400 Installation & Implementation of
Portable Condition Monitoring Programs
CMVA60-K
CM-F0072S Machinery Data Sheets (25
CMVA60 Microlog Data Collector/Ana-
Sheets)
lyzer, Single Channel
CM-F0077 Literature, Using Machinery
CMVA6112 Microlog Support Module
Data Sheets
CMVA50230-1 Battery Pack, NiMH (Spare)
CMVA60-K-CE (European Community
CMVA3355 AC/DC Adapter, Universal Approved)
115V/230V
CMVA60 Microlog Data Collector/Ana-
CMVA3351 Cable Power Cord For lyzer, Single Channel
CMVA3355 UL110
CMVA6112-CE Microlog Support Module
CMVA6131 Microlog Carrying Case, Ny-
CMVA50230-1 Battery Pack, NiMH (Spare)
lon, Black
CMVA3355 AC/DC Adapter, Universal
CMSS50077A Cable, Microlog to Support
115V/230V
Module, 4 feet
CMVA3351 Cable Power Cord For
CMSS50080 Cable, Support Module to PC,
CMVA3355 UL110
4 feet
CMVA6131 Microlog Carrying Case, Ny-
CMSS250 25 Pin to 9 Pin Adapter, Support
lon, Black
Module to PC
CMSS50077A-CE Cable, Microlog to Sup-
CMVA60M User Manual, Microlog
port Module, 4 feet
CMSS50079 Cable Microlog to BNC (No
CMSS50080-CE Cable, Support Module to
Power) 5 feet
PC, 4 feet
CMSS3073 Adapter, BNC to Banana Plugs
CMVAManual User Manual, Microlog
CMSS787A Accelerometer

CMVA60 Microlog B - 3
User Manual
Specifications
Specifications for CMVA60

CMSS50079-CE Cable Microlog to BNC ACCESSORIES

(No Power) 5 feet
CMSS6160 Printer Adapter
CMSS787A Accelerometer
CMSS6155K-0 (115V) CMSS6155K-1
CMSS31476400-CE Cable Microlog to (230V) Optical Phase Reference Kits
CMSS787A Accelerometer
CMSS6195K-0 (115V) CMSS6195K-1
CMSS60139-04 Stinger Accelerometer Tip (230V) Laser Phase Reference Kits
4.5 inches
CMSS6156 Magnetic holder for
CMSS908-MD Magnetic Base, Accelerome- CMSS6155 AND CMSS6195 Phase Kits
ter, 1 1/2 inches
CMSS6165K-0 (115V) CMSS6165K-1
CMSSAD-BLANK Stainless Discs (Quick (230V) Strobe-Lite Kits
Disconnect) (10 Discs, 1 pack)
CMSS6186K Infrared Temperature Probe
31641400 Installation & Implementation of
CMSS6187 Current Clamp Probe
Portable Condition Monitoring Programs
CMSS6190 Audio Headphones
CM-F0072S Machinery Data Sheets (25
Sheets) CMSS6188K High Temperature Acceler-
ometer Kit
CM-F0077 Literature, Using Machinery
Data Sheets CMSS793K Low Frequency Accelerometer
Kit
Although care has been taken to assure the
accuracy of the data compiled in the above
specifications, SKF does not assume any li-
ability for errors or omissions. SKF re-
serves the right to alter any part of the
above specifications without prior notice.

B - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 12-13-91 10:20 S.G.

Appendix C
Why Zoom?

FFT frequency zoom narrows the analysis display interval

and increases frequency resolution. If there are closely
spaced peaks in a spectrum, increasing the number of FFT
lines by depressing the front panel zoom key allows you to
separate the peaks, thereby achieving both amplitude accu-
racy and improved frequency definition. Each ZOOM IN
key press doubles the line resolution and halves the display
interval. The resolution can only be increased to the 6400
line limit of the single-channel Microlog and to 3200 lines
in the two-channel Microlog. ZOOM OUT doubles the
display interval and halves the line resolution.
The Microlog uses a nondestructive method of applying
zoom. After the signals have been averaged and displayed
within the restricted frequency interval, the spectral com-
ponents outside the zoom display can be viewed by moving
the cursor to the display edge. Other spectrum sectors are
displayed without performing new measurements.
The Microlog automatically sets the appropriate zoom
range whenever the fstart to fmax range is entered as less
than 1/2 of the maximum frequency.
For example, if;
fstart = 500 Hz, fmax = 1 kHz, and Lines of resolu-
tion = 400,
in order to provide the required 400-line resolution be-
tween fstart and fmax, the Microlog automatically selects
800 lines as the fzero to fmax resolution.

CMVA60 Microlog C - 1
User Manual
Why Zoom?

If;
fstart = 750 Hz, fmax = 1000, and Lines = 400,
the Microlog automatically selects 1600 lines. Under
these circumstances, the display cannot be changed to
view spectral components outside the fstart to fmax display
range.
Zoom is often required to separate sideband peaks about a
major peak. The sideband frequency difference allows
you to identify the modulation shaft frequency associated
with the vibration peak.
Another application of zoom is to increase the time do-
main display so repetitive transients can be viewed in the
time display. The time display for Lines = 400 and fmax
= 1 kHz is 0.4 sec. Increasing the resolution to 6400
lines changes the time display range to 4.8 seconds.

C - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Appendix D
Multi-pin Input Pinouts

Pinout Diagram
Model CMVA60 RS232 D Connector Pinout
Pin Description
01 Chassis Ground
02 Transmit
03 Receive
04 STB (Strobe interrupt for Printer)
05 BF (Trigger input from CMSS6135D)
06 Connected to 19 (Battery recharge input)
07 Ground
08 D I/O 0
09 D I/O 1
10 D I/O 2
11 D I/O 3
12 D I/O 4 Parallel I/O Port
13 D I/O 5
14 D I/O 6
15 D I/O 7
16 -5S2 (-5 Volt power supply from Signal Processing
Boards)
17 + 5S2 (+ 5 Volt power supply from Signal Processing
Boards)
18 + 5S1 (+ 5 Volt power supply from Digital Processing
Board)
19 Connected to 06 (Battery Recharge Input)
20 Signal Ground
21 DC/Process Input/"SEE" Low
22 AC/Dynamic Input
23 + 24V/2.2mA (ICP power supply)
24 Charge Amp Input/ "SEE" High
25 < Reserved>

CMVA60 Microlog D-1

User Manual
Multi-pin Input Pinouts
Pinout Diagram

(This page intentionally blank)

D-2 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Appendix E
Remote Communications

Overview
Remote upload/download procedures are accomplished us-
ing a modem link between PRISM4 Remote and the
Microlog.
For successful remote communications, you must pre-set
parameters on the Microlog and in the PRISM4 Remote
software. Standard setups for each of these are discussed
below.

Preference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

To set up PRISM4 Remote communications:
• In the Windows Program Manager window,

double-click the PRISM4 Solutions group icon

to open the group window.
• In the group window, double-click the P4Re-
mote program icon to run PRISM4 Remote.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 1
User Manual
Remote Communications 4
Preference Settings (PRISM Remote)

System Preferences
Set tings.pcx

Figure E - 1.
The Settings Menu.

• In PRISM4 Remote’s main window, select the

Settings menu’s System option. The System
Preferences dialog box displays.
sys-pref.pcx

Figure E - 2.
The System Preferences Dialog Box.

E - 2 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Preference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

System Preferences options are:

PRISM4 Program Dir
Enter the complete directory path of the directory contain-
ing your PRISM4 program.

¾ The Directory PATH setting is used to locate

PRISM4 users and is necessary to create
upload log files.
Unit System
• Select Metric or English.
Freq. Scale
• Select Hz or CPM.
• Click the check mark command button to exit
the System Preferences dialog box and save the
settings.

¾ If the PRISM4 program directory contains

more than one user, a user list displays
names from which to choose. The selected
user name displays on the title bar.

Communication Preferences
• Select the Settings menu’s Communication op-
tion.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 3
User Manual
Remote Communications 4
Preference Settings (PRISM Remote)

comm.pcx

Figure E - 3.
The Communication Preferences Dialog Box.

Modem Mode
• Set the Modem Mode option to Auto Answer
(default mode).
Modem Setup
• Set the Modem Setup option to Factory de-
fault (recommended mode) or Stored profile.

¾ If Stored profile is selected, you may enter

modem specific commands in the Modem
Setup String field to customize your mo-
dem. PRISM4 Remote saves these com-
mands to the modem memory and sets up
the modem using the stored profile com-
mands.
Com Port
• Set the Com Port option to the com port to
which the modem is connected.

E - 4 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Preference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

Baud Rate
• Set the Baud rate.

¾ If you are using “ voice quality” telephone

lines, baud rates of 4800 or lower are the
most successful. Voice quality lines may oc-
casionally handle higher baud rates depend-
ing on the time of day and how “ clean” the
phone line. If you are using “ data quality”
telephone lines, baud rates of 9600 or
higher are successful.
Data Bits / Parity / Stop Bits
• Set the Data Bits, Parity, and Stop Bits set-
tings to their default values (8, none, 1).
• Click the check mark command button to exit
the Communication Preferences dialog box
and save the settings.
Password Setup
• Select the Settings menu’s Password option.
The Password Setup dialog box displays.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 5
User Manual
Remote Communications 4
Preference Settings (PRISM Remote)

passst up.pcx

Figure E - 4.
The Password Setup Dialog Box.

The Password Setup dialog box always indicates the de-

fault REMOTE password, and the default PRISM4 data di-
rectory “ P4DATA” branching from PRISM4 Remotes
program directory.
Each user password is associated with specific databases
via the databases directory paths. A remote Microlog user
is allowed access only to those databases which are associ-
ated to their password.

¾ The user password cannot contain spaces.

Password - adding a new user password:

• In the Password Setup dialog box, click the +
button to add a new user password. The Add
Password dialog box displays.

E - 6 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Preference Settings (PRISM4 Remote)

addpass.pcx

Figure E - 5.
The Add Password Dialog Box.

Add Password options are:

Data Directory - Enter the PRISM4 database direc-
tory path in which to associate the user password.
Password - Enter the new user password.

¾ If you wish to allow everyone access to all

databases, set up a blank password for each
database.
• Click the check mark button to exit the Add
Password dialog box and save the changes.
Password - editing an existing password:
• In the Password Setup dialog box, click the
Edit button, the Edit Password dialog box dis-
plays.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 7
User Manual
Remote Communications 4
Preference Settings (PRISM Remote)

edit pass.pcx

Figure E - 6.
The Edit Password Dialog Box.

• Make changes to the existing data directory and

password, then click the check mark button to
exit the Edit Password dialog box and save the
changes.
Password - deleting an existing password:
• In the Password Setup dialog box, highlight the
password to delete.
• Click the - command button to delete the high-
lighted password.

E - 8 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Placing PRISM4 Remote in "Waiting" Mode

Placing PRISM4 Remote in "Waiting" Mode

After the PRISM4 Remotes modem communication pa-
rameters are properly set up, select PRISM4 Remotes
Microlog/Transfer option to place PRISM4 Remote in
waiting mode. The Modem Status window displays the
following messages:
Checking...
Reset Modem...
Setup Modem...
Put Modem in Auto Answer...
Waiting for incoming calls
mic-trns.pcx

Figure E - 7.
The Modem Status Window.

Once activated, PRISM4 Remote remains in a waiting

mode until a remote Microlog logs in. If the remote Mi-
crolog shuts down without logging out, PRISM4 Remote
waits, and if a reconnection does not occur, PRISM4 Re-
mote terminates the connection and enters a waiting mode
for the next connection.

¾ If a user at the host computer wishes to exit

from the waiting mode or ends the remote
communications by clicking on the Cancel
command button, it may take a few seconds

CMVA60 Microlog E - 9
User Manual
Remote Communications
Preference Settings (Microlog)

for the host computer to disconnect the mo-

dem and close the Modem Status window.

Preference Settings (Microlog)

To set the Microlog’s communication mode:
• Using the SKF CMSS50238 modem cable, con-
nect the Microlog to the modem.
• Of the cable’s two connectors, ensure the con-
nector with the “ clip” is attached to the
Microlog.
• Turn on the Microlog. From the Microlog’s
Main menu, select the Utilities/Communica-
tions option, the Communications menu ap-
pears.
mlch8-44.pcx

Figure E - 8.
The Communications Menu.

E - 10 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Preference Settings (Microlog)

Set communications options as described below.

Baud
• Set Baud Rate to match your PRISM4 Remote
setting.

Modem Mode
• Set Modem Mode to Originate.
This is the required mode for PRISM4 Remote com-
munications. PRISM4 Remote is left in a “ waiting”
state. The Microlog operator accesses Transfer
through the Microlog’s Main menu. The Microlog
dials the host computer, and the Microlog’s operator
can perform uploads, downloads, change databases,
and clear memory.

Microlog Remote
• Set the Microlog Remote option to Yes to en-
able the Microlog to communicate with PRISM4
Remote.

Phone #
• Enter the phone number of the host computer
running PRISM4 Remote.

¾ Always prefix the phone number with ATDT

to establish modem communications.
Modem Setup
(optional) Enter modem specific control commands.

¾ Modem specific control commands are not

recommended, unless absolutely necessary.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 11
User Manual
Remote Communications
Microlog Login (Remote Communication Module)

Microlog Login (Remote Communication Module)

Logging in with the proper password allows a Microlog operator

to download and upload data by modem to an unattended host
computer’s database, allows the operator to change the database
being accessed, and allows the operator to clear the Microlog
memory in preparation for loading new ROUTEs.
Warning:
The Microlog protects from unintentionally deleting collected
data. If an operator enters a different password than the person
who last used the Microlog, a "database conflict" displays and en-
try is denied. The operator must intentionally initialize the Mi-
crolog (erase all previously stored data) before attempting login.

To access the Remote Login screen:

• From the main menu screen, select Transfer
with the pointer bar and press < ENTER> .

E - 12 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Microlog Login (Remote Communication Module)

remotel1.pcx

Figure E - 9.
The Remote Login Screen.

Remote Login fields are:

Username
Identifies an individual user. This field is for information
only, the system does not verify its correctness. The User-
name appears in the REMOTE.LOG file to identify pass-
word users.

¾ To enter alphabetic characters, press the

Microlog’s shift key (SHIFT) at the bottom
of the keypad. An arrow in the middle of
the screen’s top status line indicates that you
are in alphabetic mode. If you make a typ-
ing mistake you may UNshift and use the ar-
row keys to move the cursor, however, it is
often easier to press < ESCAPE> to delete
the line, then re-type it.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 13
User Manual
Remote Communications
Microlog Login (Remote Communication Module)

• Enter a Username (name, employee number,

etc.) and press < ENTER> . The pointer bar
advances to the next field (Password).
Password
The system verifies the entered password against the list of
passwords/databases specified in the Password Setup dia-
log in PRISM4 Remote. Users may only access databases
that their password authorizes them to use. (See Warning
above.)
• Enter a valid password and press < ENTER> .
Connection Parameters
• To view Connection Parameters , press the F2
key while in Remote Login menu.
remotel2.pcx

Figure E - 10.
The Connection Parameters Screen.

Values displayed on the Connection Parameters screen

are for information only and must not be edited, else
PRISM4 Remote communications are disrupted.

E - 14 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Microlog Login (Remote Communication Module)

Completing Login
• To complete the login procedure, press the F1-
Connect key. The following messages appear
on the screen:
Starting modem...
Dialing host...
Connect ______...
Host answered...
Host prog available...
Comparing databases...
On login from a remote Microlog, if no activity occurs
during a reasonable time period (10-15 seconds), press
< ESCAPE> to abort the transfer and retry the login. If
the modem provides indicator lights, verify activity by ob-
serving flashing lights.

¾ Should the modem cable disconnect from

the Microlog or host for any reason, after re-
connection, the modem must be reset by
turning it off for 15 seconds and then on.
When communication connection is ob-
tained, the Remote Active menu appears on
the Microlog display (see below), and the
Modem Status window displays the mes-
sage “ Communication link established” on
the host computer.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 15
User Manual
Remote Communications
Send Data

rem-actv.pcx

Figure E - 11.
The Remote Active Menu.

Send Data
The Send Data option uploads the collected ROUTE(s) to
an “ upload file” in the host computer (to await “ process-
ing” into the appropriate database).

¾ After sending data, you must run PRISM4

for Windows, select the appropriate database
with the System Preferences/Data Dir. op-
tion, then utilize the Transfer menus Proc-
ess Data option to store uploaded data into
the PRISM4 database.
If multiple ROUTEs were uploaded to vari-
ous databases, you must, in turn, select each
database and process its data.

E - 16 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Send Data

To send data:
• On the Remote Active menu, move the pointer
bar to Send Data and press < ENTER> . The
Upload Routes screen appears.
upldrte.pcx

Figure E - 12.
The Send Data/Upload Routes Screen.

• Move the pointer bar to the ROUTE you wish to

upload (or press F1 to send all ROUTEs) and
press < ENTER> . The message Sending
Route and the names of Routes being uploaded
appear on the screen.
• During the upload, the Microlog reports the
transfer statistics.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 17
User Manual
Remote Communications
Load Route

t ransfer.pcx

Figure E - 13.
The Upload Route(s)/Transfer Screen.

Transfer is complete when the message DATA

TRANSMITTED OK appears. If no data is trans-
ferred, the message NO DATA TRANSFERRED dis-
plays.
• Press < ESCAPE> to exit to the Remote Active menu.

Load Route
Loading ROUTEs (downloading) transfers ROUTE hierar-
chy and measurement setups for a specified ROUTE (or
from all the ROUTEs) of a specific database to the
Microlog data collector.
To load a ROUTE (download a ROUTE):
• On the Remote Active menu, move the pointer
bar to Load Route and press < ENTER> .
• ROUTE names display (for the active database)
on the Download Route(s) screen.

E - 18 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Load Route

When selecting ROUTEs to download, scroll up and down

using the up arrow and down arrow keys. If there are
more than ten ROUTEs in a data directory, only ten ap-
pear on the screen at a time and the word MORE appears
at the bottom of the list of ROUTEs. Select MORE to dis-
play the next set of ten ROUTEs. You cannot move back-
wards to view a previous group of ten ROUTEs. If you
need to select a ROUTE in a previous group of ten, press
ESC-exit and reenter Load Route.

¾ To download ROUTEs from a different data-

base, use the Remote Active menus Change
DBase option discussed in the next section.
dow nload.pcx

Figure E - 14.
The Download Route(s) Screen.

• Move the pointer bar to highlight the ROUTE

you wish to download from the host computer
(or press F1 to download ALL ROUTEs) and
press < ENTER> . A Receiving Route mes-

CMVA60 Microlog E - 19
User Manual
Remote Communications
Change DBase

sage with the requested ROUTE name (or ALL)

appears on the screen.
• When transfer begins, the Microlog reports
transfer statistics.
t ransfer.pcx

Figure E - 15.
The Transfer Screen.

• Transfer is complete when the DATA TRANS-

MITTED OK message appears on the message
line at the bottom of your screen.
• Press < ESCAPE> to exit to the Remote Ac-
tive menu.

Change DBase
If you are authorized to access more than one PRISM4 da-
tabase, you may change the active database with the
Change DBase function.

E - 20 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Change DBase

¾ Before changing the active database (to pre-

pare for downloading a ROUTE from a dif-
ferent database), you must first clear the
Microlog’s memory using the Clear Mem-
ory option discussed in this chapters next
section.
To change the active database:
• On the Remote Active menu, move the pointer
bar to Change DBase and press < ENTER> .
The message Getting database names appears on
the screen. The host computer sends a list of all data-
base names authorized to your password.
change.pcx

Figure E - 16.
The Data Base Change Screen.

• Move the pointer bar to select a database and

press < ENTER> .

CMVA60 Microlog E - 21
User Manual
Remote Communications
Clear Memory

• The following message appears on the screen:

WARNING
This will remove all collected data
and all route information.
Do you wish to proceed?
To make room for the new database (that is, new ROUTEs
or POINTs) the system clears the Microlog’s memory of
all previous data and storage parameters and loads the se-
lected database.
• The message “ Sending Parameters” appears
during the changing of databases. The transfer
is complete when “ Done changing databases”
appears on the screen.
• Press < ESCAPE> to exit to the Remote Ac-
tive menu.

Clear Memory
When the Microlog is storing a ROUTE and you wish to
download a ROUTE from a different database, you must
first clear the Microlog’s memory using the Clear Mem-
ory option.
To clear the Microlog’s memory:
• To clear all collected data and all ROUTE infor-
mation, move the pointer bar to Clear Memory
on the Remote Active menu and press < EN-
TER> .
• The following message appears on the screen:
WARNING
This will remove all collected data
and all route information.
Do you wish to proceed?

E - 22 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Reset DBase

• Move the pointer bar to YES and press < EN-

TER> .
If data was not collected on all POINTs, or all POINTS
were not uploaded, the following warning message appears
on the screen.
Warning:
Data not taken on all points
or not all points uploaded!
If data was intentionally collected on only a portion of the
database, the above message still appears. It is simply a
warning to the user.
The system clears the Microlog’s memory of all data and
storage parameters.
During the clearing of data, a “ Database is being
cleared” message appears on the screen. When the Clear
process is complete, “ Database is cleared!” appears on
the screen.
When memory has cleared, the system returns to the Re-
mote Active screen.

Reset DBase
Use the Reset DBase option to re-collect data on the
ROUTE stored in the Microlog.
For example, if you are only working with one ROUTE,
you collect ROUTE data and upload it to the host com-
puter. A week passes and you wish to perform data collec-
tion on the same ROUTE. You first reset the ROUTE in
the Microlog using Reset DBase before re-collecting
ROUTE data.

CMVA60 Microlog E - 23
User Manual
Remote Communications
Reset DBase

To reset all ROUTEs:

• Move the pointer bar to Reset DBase and press
< ENTER> .
• The following warning message appears on the
screen:
WARNING:
This will remove all Spectrum and Time
data, but will retain the route setup
information with the updated overall value.
Do you wish to proceed?

• Press YES to reset all ROUTEs. The Microlog

resets all ROUTEs by removing all spectrum
and time data, and moves the THIS value (most
recent overall value) to the LAST value (prior
overall value). ROUTE(s) POINT setup infor-
mation is retained.

¾ If all POINTs were not collected, or all data

was not uploaded, a warning message ap-
pears. Press F1 to continue or ESC to exit.
• The following messages appear on the screen:
Resetting database...
Database is reset.
The Microlog is now ready for data to be collected for us-
ers not needing to re-download ROUTEs from the host.
Memory is made available for data to be taken.
When all ROUTEs have all been reset, the system returns
to the Remote Active screen.

E - 24 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Disconnect

Disconnect
To disconnect from the host:
• On the Remote Active screen, move the pointer
bar to Disconnect and press < ENTER> . The
following messages appear on the screen:
Sending disconnect request....
Disconnecting...
Disconnect completed...

• When disconnect is complete, the system re-

turns to the main menu screen.

¾ If the remote Microlog fails to disconnect,

PRISM4 Remote automatically disconnects
after a minute or two and enters a “ waiting”
state for the next connection.

Supported Modems
PRISM4 Remote and Microlog
The following modems were verified as compatible with
PRISM4 Remote / Microlog operations:
Modems attached to PRISM4 Remote
Modems attached to the Microlog
US Robotics Sportster 28,800 Fax Modem
Practical Peripherals PM144MT11 Modem 14,400
Hayes Smartmodem OPTIMA 144
US Robotics Sportster 14,400 FAX Modem
US Robotics Sportster 28.800 FAX Modem
US Robotics Sportster 28,800 FAX Modem

CMVA60 Microlog E - 25
User Manual
Remote Communications
Troubleshooting Modem Communications

Practical Peripherals PM144MT11 Modem 14,400

US Robotics Sportster 14,400 FAX Modem
Motorola SURFR 288
Motorola SURFR 288
Motorola SURFR 288
US Robotics Sportster 28,800 FAX Modem
US Robotics Sportster 14,400 FAX Modem
Hayes ULTIMA 144

¾ The Motorola SURFR 288 has very good

connect and throughput, and is recom-
mended for higher baud rates.

Troubleshooting Modem Communications

PRISM4 Remote fails to communicate with the mo-
dem. When in Auto Answer mode, PRISM4 Remote
displays the “Modem NOT working or NOT on” mes-
sage in the Modem Status window.
• Turn the modem off and power it on again.
• Check the modem phone line and the serial ca-
ble (if the modem is external) to ensure a good
connection.
• Verify the modem is connected to the right
COM port (COM1 or COM2) and the correct
COM port setting is selected in the PRISM4s
Communication Preferences dialog box.
• Verify the modems COM port is not being used
by another serial device installed in your com-
puter. Do not use the same COM port for your
modem and serial mouse. If your modem is on
COM1, the mouse can only use COM2 or
COM4. If your modem is on COM2, the
mouse can only use COM1 or COM3.

E - 26 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Remote Communications
Troubleshooting Modem Communications

• Run the Terminal program (located in the Win-

dows Program Manager/Accessories group) to
ensure the modem is configured correctly for
Windows. To do so:
• Exit PRISM4 Remote, then exit all
other applications except the Program
Manager.
• Run the Terminal program and select
the Settings menus Communications
option (to ensure the correct Com Port
setting).
• Type the command “ AT” (without the
quotation marks) and press < EN-
TER> . If everything is correct, OK
or 0 (zero) should appear on the mo-
dem terminal screen.

¾ If you do not see the text echoed back to the

screen as you type the command, use the
Settings menus Terminal Preferences op-
tion to select Local Echo as the Terminal
Mode.
If the modem does not work in Terminal (OK or 0 is not
returned after typing AT), try the following:
• Disable 32-bit file access. To do so, select the
Control Panels 386 Enhanced, choose the Vir-
tual Memory button, choose the Change but-
ton, then clear the Use 32-Bit Disk Access
check box.
• In the Windows directory, open the SYS-
TEM.INI file and check the [Boot] section for
the proper communications driver. Search for
the line that reads, COMM.DRV= . The line
should read, COMM.DRV= COMM.DRV, un-
less the COMM.DRV on the right side indicates
a third party driver (Windows FAX or communi-

CMVA60 Microlog E - 27
User Manual
Remote Communications
Troubleshooting Modem Communications

cation programs are applications that might re-

place the standard driver with one of their own).
If COMM.DRV is set to anything other than the
standard driver (COMM.DRV), change the line
to read COMM.DRV= COMM.DRV.

¾ Ensure the line is not commented out (com-

ments in the .INI files are defined with a
semicolon at the beginning of the line).
• Also, ensure the COMM.DRV file in the Win-
dows SYSTEM subdirectory is dated 3/10/92
and has a file size of 9280 bytes (for Windows
3.1), or is dated 11/1/93 with a file size of 5968
bytes (for Windows for Workgroups 3.11). If
the date or size is incorrect, perform the next
step. Otherwise, exit all programs and restart
Windows.
• Quit Windows. Then, use the EXPAND utility
in the Windows directory to reinstall
COMM.DRV from the Windows Setup disks to
the WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory. To do so,
type the following from a DOS prompt:
expand a:\comm.dr_ c:\windows\system\comm.drv
If the Terminal program prompts that the COM port is not
supported, or is being used by another device, the problem
might be with the computers configuration. Check for:
• Any TSR programs that are using the COM port.
• Another Windows program that is using the
COM port is currently running.
• Interrupt conflicts with the COM port and an-
other hardware card such as a network card.

E - 28 CMVA60 Microlog
User Manual
 Appendix F
Microlog Download Utility
Microlog Download Utility allows the user to download
CMVA60 version 3.80 or newer code or download differ-
ent fonts.

¾ CMVA60 Microlog must have version 3.75

EPROM installed to download new code.
CMVA60 Microlog version 3.75 is available
in English only.

Installing Microlog Download Utility

> To install the Microlog Download Utility program on
your computer:
• Insert the MLDnldr1.1 diskette into your
floppy drive.
• Select Run option from Windows ’95 or Win-
dows 3.1.
• In the Command Line text box, type
A:\SETUP (if your diskette is in drive A) or
B:\SETUP (if your diskette is in drive B) and
click the OK command button. The setup pro-
gram displays the Welcome screen.
• Follow the installation instructions on the screen.

CMVA60 Microlog F-1

User Manual
Microlog Download Utility
Connecting your Microlog

Connecting your Microlog

> To connect your Microlog system:
• Using the supplied CMSS50080, CMSS50080-
CE cable, or CMSS250 (25 PIN to 9 PIN adapt-
er supporting 9 PIN serial ports), connect your
host computer to the support module between
the connection marked COMPUTER on the
support module and one of the serial ports
(COM1 or COM2) on the back of your com-
puter.
• Using the supplied CMSS50077 cable, connect
the support module to the Microlog between the
connector marked MICROLOG on the support
module and the 25-pin D connector on the top
surface of the Microlog Collector.
• Plug the support module into an AC power sup-
ply through the external transformer adapter sup-
plied with the support module.

Microlog Setup
To download CMVA60 version 3.80 or newer code the
CMVA60 must run from the boot EPROM.

> To boot from the EPROM:

• With the Microlog OFF, simultaneously hold
down the Microlog’s 9 and 3 keys.
• While depressing the 9 and 3 keys, press and re-
lease the ON/OFF key, then immediately re-
lease the 9 and 3 keys.
• The Microlog starts and displays a Code Execu-
tion message "Executing Microlog default
code press ENTER to continue....

F-2 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Microlog Download Utility
Downloading Code/Fonts

• Press < ENTER> , the Microlog power up

screen displays. Verify that your Microlog’s ver-
sion is 3.75.
• At the Main menu, move the pointer bar to
3:Transfer and press < ENTER> or press 3.
The Transfer screen displays.
• Your Microlog set up is complete.

Downloading Code/Fonts
> To download code/fonts to the Microlog:
• Use the Windows’ File Manager to locate
C:\p4sol\downldr directory and double-click
on MFD.EXE. The Microlog Download Util-
ity main window displays.
main-w in.pcx

Figure F - 1.
The Microlog Download Utility Main Window.

• From the Microlog Download Utility window,

select the File menu’s Open option. The Select
File dialog displays.

CMVA60 Microlog F-3

User Manual
Microlog Download Utility
Downloading Code/Fonts

sel-file.pcx

Figure F - 2.
The Select File Dialog Box.

• Click on the List Files of Type drop down list

box. Select Binary Files (*.bin) for codes or
8x8 Files (*.f8) for fonts.
• Select the desired file from the file name list
box and click OK.
• From the File menu, select the Communication
option. The Communication Preferences dia-
log box displays.
• Verify that the Com Port and Baud Rate set-
tings are correct and click OK.
• From the File menu, select the Download op-
tion. The message "Downloading data.
Please wait..." displays on the screen.

F-4 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Microlog Download Utility
Downloading Code/Fonts

¾ If downloading code, the Microlog screen

displays the message, "Erasing Flash mem-
ory", then the Transfer screen displays the
number of code blocks downloaded.
When the "Downloading data. Please wait..." message
disappears from your computer screen, the downloading
process is complete.

> To run in Flash memory:

• Turn the Microlog Off, then On again.
• From the Microlog power up screen, verify that
the version is 3.80 or newer.

CMVA60 Microlog F-5

User Manual
Microlog Download Utility
Downloading Code/Fonts

(This page intentionally blank)

F-6 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Appendix G
Introduction to the Triax
Accelerometer Sensor

Overview
The Triax Accelerometer Sensor automatically sequences
through three measurements for the sensor location (one
for each axis monitored by the triax accelerometer sen-
sor). This application requires an external triax mod-
ule/cable assembly and a triax accelerometer sensor. A
triaxial MPA ROUTE must be created in PRISM4 to ac-
commodate the triax interface.
During data collection, the triax module/cable assembly’s
LED display indicates which axis is being monitored.
Red - Axis 2
Green - Axis 3
Yellow - Axis 1

How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

Triax mounting configuration factors to be considered are:
mounting location, accessibility, temperature, and orienta-
tion.

CMVA 60 Microlog G-1

User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

Figure G - 1.
Mounting the Triax Accelerometer Sensor.

¾ The triax accelerometer sensor’s axes are la-

beled Axis 1, Axis 2, and Axis 3. The user
is responsible for matching and assigning a
labeled axis to a measurement orientation
(i.e. horizontal, vertical, axial).
To collect valid measurements, the triax-sensor must al-
ways be oriented in the same direction for all measure-
ments at the same location.

¾ One axis of the triax accelerometer sensor

must be aligned with the shaft centerline.

G-2 CMVA 60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

For example, if the machine is mounted horizontally, then

mount the triax-sensor in the vertical direction to the shaft
so Axis 2 is always pointing in the axial direction, Axis 1
in the horizontal direction, and Axis 3 in the vertical direc-
tion. If a vertical mounting is not possible, mount the
triax-sensor in the horizontal direction to the shaft. Please
note that now the horizontal and vertical axes are reversed
for this measurement POINT.
There are three basic mounting methods for the Triax-Sen-
sor:
• permanent screw mount
• studs with adapters
• magnet base mount

Permanent Mount with Screw

Screw mounting results in the widest frequency measure-
ment range. It is recommended for permanent monitoring
systems only, higher frequency test, and harsh environ-
ments.

¾ Before drilling into a machine housing or

any item being prepared for mounting, it is
imperative to know wall thickness and depth
constraints (i.e., mounting bolts, bearings,
or other items) that might be behind the
mounting surface. SKF is not responsible
for damage to items as a result of these
mounting instructions.
The mounting point on the structure should be faced 1.1
times greater than the area of the sensor’s mounting sur-
face. For measurements involving frequencies above 1
kHz, the surface should be flat within 0.001’’ (.025 mm)
and have surface texture no greater than 32 micro-inches
(0.8 µm). The tapped hole must be perpendicular to the
mounting surface and at least two threads deeper than the
remaining threads of the screw.

CMVA 60 Microlog G-3

User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

Studs and Adapter

Stud mounting is ideal for enabling temporary or periodic
vibration measurements for moderate frequency ranges.
Stud Installation Instructions

¾ Before drilling into a machine housing or

any item being prepared for mounting, it is
imperative to know wall thickness and depth
constraints (i.e., mounting bolts, bearings,
or other items) that might be behind the
mounting surface. SKF is not responsible
for damage to items as a result of these
mounting instructions.

G-4 CMVA 60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

triax accelerometer
1/4-28 screw sensor

triax female
quick connect

triax stud

1/4-28 x 3/4 in. screw

machine

Figure G - 2.

CMVA 60 Microlog G-5

User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

Tools:
Hand grinder with small surface grinder
1/8in. to 3/16in. or 5mm to 7mm diameter pilot drill
CMAC9600-01 Tool Kit for 1/4-28 stud
CMAC9600-02 Tool Kit for M8 1.25 stud
3/8 inch or larger electric drill
Adjustable wrench or 7/8 in. open-end wrench
• Select location for mounting - Inspect for possi-
ble items behind the mounting area. For best re-
sults, placement should be as close to the
bearing load zone as possible.
• Prepare surface - Within a 2-inch-square area,
chip away loose paint, remove dirt, and grind
the surface flat and clean with a hand tool.
• Determine depth for mounting studs - Threads
must be at least 6mm (.236 in.) deep. To mark
the depth, place the drill bit next to the stud’s
mounting post and place electrical tape around
the drill bit to indicate the desired depth (or, if
available, use a depth gauge).
• Begin drilling - In the 2-inch-square area’s cen-
ter, mark the hole location with a center punch.
Start by drilling a small pilot hole with a 6.7mm
drill bit for the M8 X 1.25 thread or a #3 drill
for the 1/4-28 thread, then enlarge the pilot hole
with the CMAC9600-06 drill bit (M8 1.25), or
the 9600-03 drill bit (1/4-28). The hole should
be perpendicular to the surface.
• Insert pilot - Insert the CMAC9600-08 pilot
(M8 1.25) or the CMAC9600-05 pilot (1/4-28)
into the CMAC9600-09 counter bore. The pilot
should be mounted flush to the fluted cutting
edge. Tighten the pilot in the counter bore us-
ing the supplied wrench.

G-6 CMVA 60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
How to Mount the Triax Accelerometer Sensor

• Spot face mounting area - Using the piloted

counter bore, spot face the recess until smooth
(32µin .0.8µm), until the surface is approxi-
mately 1 inch in diameter.
• Tap hole - Use the CMAC9600-07 tap (M8
1.25) or CMAC9600-04 tap (1/4-28) to hand
tap the hole to the desired thread depth.
Important: Do not bottom-out or over torque the tap.
• Clean - Clean the spot faced surface and the
stud with alcohol, CHEMLOKTM primer, or a
similar solvent. Use a lint free rag and clean
very thoroughly. Allow to set a few minutes to
allow the cleaning solvent to evaporate.
• Apply adhesive (optional, not suggested unless
stud is to be a permanent installation) - A two-
part acrylic adhesive is required. Use SKF
CMCP210 acrylic adhesive or a 460/17 acrylic
product. Remove the divider attached to the ad-
hesive pack. Thoroughly mix the two-part adhe-
sive together for one to two minutes, stretching
both sides along a table’s edge. Coat the stud’s
threads and bottom with the adhesive.
• Connect the adapter to the bottom of the triax-
sensor with the supplied L/4-28 screw. For
proper orientation, connect the stud to the sen-
sor’s adapter before tightening the stud to the
surface.
• Orient the triax-sensor in the proper orientation
as outlined above. Then disconnect the adapter
from the stud without changing its orientation
and tighten the stud with the 1/4-28 x 3/4 in
screw to the surface. The triax-sensor will al-
ways point in the correct direction, as the adapt-
er can only connect one way.
• Tighten - Mount and tighten the stud (24 in.-lbs
/ 2.9 Nm). Be careful not to over torque.

CMVA 60 Microlog G-7

User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA ROUTE Setup

Magnet Mounting Base

A magnet base with a threaded hole to accept a stud-
mount triax-sensor is a convenient means of providing a
quick or temporary mount. This method results in a re-
duced meaurement frequency range compared to screw or
stud mounts. The machine mounting surface should be
relatively smooth and flat. Again, always place the triax-
sensor at the same location with the same orientation to ob-
tain valid measurements.

Triaxial MPA ROUTE Setup

> To set up a Triaxial MPA ROUTE:
• In your PRISM4 software, access the POINT
Setup screen. The POINT Setup screen’s De-
scription field is used to identify triaxial MPA
POINTs. The first 4 characters in the Descrip-
tion field identify the triaxial MPA group to
which the POINT being configured belongs.
For MPA POINTs, the first character is always
"@". The @ character must be followed by
three alpha/numeric characters that identify the
group of triaxial MPA POINTs.
• A triaxial MPA POINT must have specific desig-
nations for the next three characters (the 5th -
7th characters) to identify the different triaxial
POINT axes (see the following table).

Triaxial POINT 5th - 7th Character Designations

1st - 4th 5th 6th 7th POINT axis (3073M1)
chars. char. char. char.
@xxx T 2 @ Triaxial, Axis 2 - Red LED
@xxx T 3 @ Triaxial, Axis 3 - Green LED
@xxx T 1 @ Triaxial, Axis 1 - Yellow LED

G-8 CMVA 60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA ROUTE Setup

In the above table, #3 - Green represents the axis number

referenced on the 3073M1 triaxial sensor, followed by the
LED color displayed on the adapter module when that axis
measuremment is monitored by the Microlog.

Figure G - 3.
PRISM4’s POINT Setup Screen.

• Create a separate POINT for each axis, in any

order.
• When all POINTs have been created, download
the ROUTE to the Microlog.

CMVA 60 Microlog G-9

User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Connecting the Triaxial Sensor to the Microlog

Connecting the Triaxial Sensor to the Microlog

triaxail.pcx
30
S/ 73
N

TRIAXIAL ACC ELER OMETER

1
3

triax accelerometer
adapter module/ sensor
cable assembly

CMVA60
Microlog

Figure G - 4.
Triax Accelerometer Sensor to Microlog Connection.

Hardware Requirements
CMVA60 Microlog Data Collector
Triax module/cable assembly kit (P/NCMAC4360)
Triax Accelerometer Sensor (included in ket)
• Connect the triaxial adapter module and cable
assembly to the triax accelerometer sensor.
• Connect the triax adapter module to the 25-pin
connector on the top of the Microlog Collector.

G - 10 CMVA 60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

¾ If the Utilities/System Setup’s Sensor/Ca-

ble Check is enabled, the Microlog detects
the presence of the triax adapter module and
conducts an automatic BOV (Bias Offset
Voltage) test on all three channels of the
triax upon power-up.
When the Microlog collector is first powered up, the re-
verse video pointer bar in the main menu appears on the
1:Route choice. Press < ENTER> to display the
ROUTE list.
• Highlight and press < ENTER> to select the
ROUTE to collect.
When the Microlog encounters a triaxial MPA group of
POINTs, it automatically displays the triaxial MPA data
collection screen (Figure G-4).
figg-2.pcx

Figure G - 5.
A Triaxial MPA Data Collection Screen.

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 11
User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

• With the highlight at the top of the list, press

< ENTER> to automatically collect all triaxial
MPA POINTs in the group.
Using the POINT’s description, the CMVA60 deter-
mines which axis is monitored by the measurement,
sets the triax adapter to the specified axis, and com-
mences data collection.

¾ Depending on the View MPA Spectrum set-

ting in Utilities/Route Setup, the Microlog
displays the corresponding spectrum (includ-
ing any FAM or Spectral band information)
allowing the operator to inspect and verify
that data is correct. Press SAVE to continue
collecting data for the remaining triaxial
MPA POINTs or press
< ESCAPE> to cancel data collection.
When data collection is completed for the first axis
POINT, the CMVA60 determines the next POINT
axis, sets the triax adapter, and collects data for the
POINT.
When data collection is completed for the second
POINT, the CMVA60 determines the last POINT
axis, sets the triax adapter, and collects data for the
POINT.
Triaxial MPA Data Collection screen items are:
A list of all POINTs in the triaxial MPA group. When
data collection is complete for all POINTs, the word
DONE appears at the bottom of the list.

Value - Stored overall value for this measurement.

Units - Units for this measurement.

Alarms - Highest alarm value exceeded for this measure-

ment.

G - 12 CMVA 60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

Current Measurement Information

ID - Identifies the current POINT’s name.

DESC - A brief description of the identified POINT.

THIS - Overall value of the current measurement.

LAST - Overall value of the previous measurement.

ALARMS - Highest alarm value exceeded. Example: if

A1 and A2 exists, A2 is displayed.

¾ MPA alarm indicator strings are consistent

with PRISM4 for Windows. Alarm indica-
tor strings are:
A1 = Overall Alarm 1
A2 = Overall Alarm 2
a = Banding Peak Alert
d = Banding Peak Danger
A = Banding Overall Alert
D = Banding Overall Danger

AVG - Displays the number of averages during data collec-

tion for each MPA POINT and displays DONE when
the MPA POINT is done.

% Change - Percent of change between the current overall

value and the measurement’s last overall value.

BAR GRAPH - A horizontal bar graph located below the

CURRENT MEASUREMENT information graphi-
cally displays the overall value. Alarm setpoints, rep-
resented by small vertical marks directly below the
bar graph, show the physical relationship between
overall value and alarm setpoints.

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 13
User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

Options
MPA options are available.
• With the MPA data collection screen displayed,
press the MENU key. The Options pop-up
menu displays. Press a numeral on the Mi-
crolog’s keypad or move the pointer bar to your
selection and press < ENTER> .
mpaopt.pcx

Figure G - 6.
The MPA Options Menu.

MPA Options are:

1:Skip Machine - Skips all MPA POINTs and subsequent
POINTs in current Machine and proceeds to the next ma-
chine in ROUTE.

2:Skip MPA Set - Skips all MPA POINTs and proceeds to

the next POINT, or group of POINTs, in the ROUTE.

3:Previous MPA Set/Point - Moves the pointer bar to the

previous MPA Set/POINT.

¾ The pointer bar may be shifted to the pre-

vious or next measurement MPA
Group/POINT with the up and down arrow
keys when the ROUTE list is visible. When
the Microlog is in the data acquisition mode,
the up and down arrow keys control the am-
plitude gain range.

G - 14 CMVA 60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

4:Coded Notes - Notes on a list are transferred from the

PRISM host software database. The list is displayed
by selecting Coded Notes.

¾ PRISM4 allows inputing a 38 character

Coded Note. The Microlog’s Coded Note
screen displays only the first 27 characters
of the Coded Note downloaded from the
PRISM software.

> To store desired coded notes with the data collected for
the POINT:
• Use the up and down arrow keys to position the
pointer bar over the coded note desired.
• Press F1 to store the note code with the data col-
lected for the MPA POINT.

¾ Multiple coded notes can be selected for the

same measurement MPA POINT in this fash-
ion.
• When all the applicable notes have been se-
lected, press < ENTER> to save.

¾ Pressing the < ESCAPE> key aborts the

process without saving any coded notes.

5:User Note - Allows you to key in a note or an observa-

tion in English. The line displayed for User Note
has a capacity of 42 characters, however only the first
30 spaces are initially displayed. When the end of
the initially displayed line is reached, entering more
characters causes the line to scroll left in the window
until the line fills to its capacity of 42 characters.
The entire 42 character line is saved and transferred
to the host.

CMVA 60 Microlog G - 15
User Manual change 01
Introduction to the Triax Accelerometer Sensor
Triaxial MPA Group Data Collection

¾ At a single measurement MPA POINT,

either a User Note or Coded Note may be
recorded but not both. The most recent
User Note or series of Coded Notes over-
write any notes recorded previously for the
same measurement MPA POINT.

6:View Setup - Summarizes all information related to the

current MPA POINT.
7:Delete MPA Set Data - Erases all data recorded for all
of the POINTs in the current MPA Group.

G - 16 CMVA 60 Microlog
change 01 User Manual
 Glossary

Accelerometer -A transducer whose output Bandpass Filter - A filter with a single trans-
is directly proportional to acceleration. mission band extending from lower to
upper cutoff frequencies.
Alignment - A condition such that the axes
of machine components are set to some Bandwidth - A spacing between frequencies.
known relationship such as, coincident,
Baseline - Spectra collected and stored for fu-
parallel, or perpendicular.
ture comparison. Usually taken when a
Amplitude - The magnitude of dynamic mo- machine is in good, or known, operat-
tion or vibration. Expressed in terms ing condition. Used as a reference for
of peak-to-peak, zero-to-peak, or rms. monitoring and analysis.
Asynchronous - Vibration components that Baud Rate - Serial communication transfer
are not related to rotating speed (also re- rate. Measured in bits per second.
ferred to a nonsynchonous).
Bit - Smallest unit of computer information
Attribute - An individual field of a SET re- storage. Equivalent to a choice of a one
cord or of a POINT record, a charac- or a zero.
teristic of a POINT or SET.
BPFO, BPFI - Ball pass frequencies of de-
Averaging - In a dynamic signal analyzer, fects on outer and inner bearing races.
digitally averaging several measure-
BSF - Ball Spin Frequency.
ments to improve statistical accuracy.
See RMS. Byte - A unit of computer information stor-
age usually equal to eight bits or one
Axial Vibration - Vibration which is parallel
character.
to a shaft’s centerline.
Buffer - An area in computer memory set
Axis - The reference plane used in plotting
aside as working space.
routines. The X-axis is the frequency
plane. The Y-axis is the amplitude Center Frequency - The center of the trans-
plane. mission band for a bandpass filter.
Balance Radius - The distance from the cen- CGA - Color Graphics Adapter.
ter of a rotor to the center of a trial or
Clone - The process of exactly duplicating a
correction weight.
SET or a POINT.
Balancing - A procedure for adjusting the ra-
dial mass distribution of a rotor so that
the centerline of the mass approaches
the geometric centerline of the rotor.

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 1

User Manual
Glossary

Close - A SET or POINT is considered

CLOSEd if the members below it in its
hierarchy are not visible. Use LEFT
¾ In the PRISM host soft-
ware, when a filter is ON,
a CRTR (CRiTeRia) ap-
ARROW to CLOSE a SET or POINT. pears in the upper right
A SET or POINT that is marked on its hand menu bar, and a color
left by a hyphen symbol is CLOSEd change occurs in the hierar-
(not OPEN). Its members are not dis- chy window.
played (not visible on screen). Also see
OPEN. Critical Speed - A rotor speed which gener-
ates high vibration amplitudes. If the
Co-Processor - An additional hardware com- speed corresponds to a resonance fre-
ponent that will speed up math process- quency of the system, it is called the bal-
ing (8087, 80287, 80387). Usually ance resonance speed.
referred to as a MATH COPROCES-
SOR. Cursor Bar - A contrasting marker strip that
appears in the active window on the
Combine Weights - All the balance weights screen. Denotes the item or function
that are distributed on the balance plane that is to be performed.
can be combined as one weight at one
phase location. Curve Fitting - The process in which coeffi-
cients of an arbitrary function are com-
CONFIG(ure) - Establishing a set of system puted such that the evaluated function
parameters for general operation. approximates the values in a given data
These parameters are usually retained set. A mathematical function, such as
in the DOS file, CONFIG.SYS. the minimum mean squared error, is
Correction Weight - The weight required to used to judge the goodness of fit.
counter the rotor mass imbalance is the Database - A group of SETs, subSETs, and
initial correction weight. POINTs arranged in a hierarcy that de-
Couple Imbalance - Results when statically fine a user’s facilities (i.e., buildings, ar-
balanced weights are 180o apart at oppo- eas, machines, data gathering
site ends of a rotor and cause rocking locations). Also a top menu bar func-
action during rotation. tion in PRISM2. Allows additions,
changes, and deletions of data in the da-
CPM - Cycles per minute. tabase.
CPS - Cycles per second. Disable - An adjustable feature of the
Criteria - A means of selecting desired items POINT setup that prevents a POINT be-
from the PRISM host software’s data- ing downloaded to the Microlog.
base. Very helpful in generating reports Display - A top menu bar function in the
or downloading to the Microlog. The PRISM host software. Offers plotting
types of selection criteria that can be routines (spectra, trend, and polar), a
set are POINTS IN ALARM, EN- means to print hardcopy of the database
ABLED POINTS, and OVERDUE setup, and an outline format. Access to
POINTS that fit a selectable date range. any history and note information and
simple report routines.
Displayed - Any SETs and POINTs that are
visible in the LIST window.

GLS - 2 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Glossary

DOS - Disk Operating System. A program EPROM - Eraseable Programable Read

with certain pre-defined functions Only Memory chips (Firmware). Used
which executes upon computer startup. in the Microlog for program storage.
DOS genertes the “ > ” prompt. Also These are replaced during program up-
referred to as MS-DOS, PC-DOS. dates to the Microlog.
Download - Transferring information to the Export - A PRISM host software feature that
MICROLOG from the host computer. copies selected points to floppy disk for
examination on another system or for
Drop-Down Window - A window that drops
storage.
down from the top menu selection bar,
showing additional menu choices. Fast Fourier Transform - A computer
method of converting a time waveform
DSA - See DYNAMIC SIGNAL ANA-
to a frequency display that shows the re-
LYZER.
lationship of discrete frequencies and
Dynamic Imbalance - A combination of their amplitudes.
both static and couple imbalance.
Field - One data item of a record. Examples
Dynamic Signal Analyzer - A vibration ana- of fields are first name, middle initial,
lyzer which uses digital signal process- last name, room number, machine ID,
ing and Fast Fourier Transform to etc.
display vibration frequency compo-
Filter - A device or function designed to pass
nents.
or reject specific data.
EGA - Enhanced Graphics Adapter.
FFT - See FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM.
Enable - A field in the POINT setup of the
Flat Top Window - A dynamic signal ana-
database that defines the POINT as be-
lyzer window function which provides
ing able or unable to be downloaded to
the best amplitude accuracy for meas-
the Microlog.
ureing discrete frequency components.
Engineering Units - The type of engineering
Flexible Shaft - Condition at rotor speeds
units of the selected transducer to be
close to or beyond first bending critical
used (i.e., G’s, Mils, etc.).
speed where dynamic effects influence
Ensemble, Spectrum - See Spectrum En- rotor deformations. The center of rota-
semble. tion shifts from the axis through the
bearing centers to the center of gravity
ENV AVG - The RMS average of the envel-
axis. The high spot and heavy spot are
oped vibration signal that is bandpass
180o out of phase.
filtered in four selectable ranges from 5
to 40 kHz. Frequency - The repetition rate of a periodic
event, usually expressed in cycles per
ENV PEAK - The peak amplitude of the en-
second (Hz), cycles per minute (CPM),
veloped vibration signal that is band-
revolutions per minute (RPM), or multi-
pass filtered in four selectable ranges
ples of running speed (orders). Orders
from 5 to 40 kHz.
are commonly referred to as 2X for
EU - See ENGINEERING UNITS. twice running speed, and so on.
Frequency Domain - An FFT graph (ampli-
tude vs. frequency).

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 3

User Manual
Glossary

FTF - Fundamental Train Frequency. Imbalance - A condition such that the center
of mass of a shaft and its geometric cen-
Gear Mesh Frequency - Vibration frequency
terlines do not coincide.
on a machine due to its gears (number
of teeth x shaft RPM). Import - Transferring data and POINT setup
by floppy disk from another PRISM
Global Close - CTRL/LEFT ARROW (also
host software system.
CLOSE key). Closes all subSETs con-
tained in the selected SET making them Influence Coefficient - In a balancing proce-
non-visible on the screen. See CLOSE. dure, a scaling vector, called the influ-
ence coefficient, is computed to relate
Global Open - CTRL/RIGHT ARROW (also
the imbalance force vector to the meas-
OPEN key). Opens all subSETs con-
ured displacement and phase. The am-
tained in a selected SET making any
plitude of this vector defines a rotor
SETs or POINTs in the given subSET
sensitivity of weight/mil at the balance
visible on the screen. See OPEN.
speed and at the exact placement of the
Hanning Window - A dynamic signal ana- measuring transducer. The phase is the
lyzer window function that provides bet- system lag of the vibration signal to the
ter frequency resolution than flat top, trasnducer.
but with reduced amplitude accuracy.
Key Phasor - A key phasor signal is a signal
Harmonic - A frequency that is an integral generated by a displacement or optical
multiple of a fundamental frequency. transducer which detects the passage of
Generally viewed in the spectrum as a keyway, set screw, or reflecting sur-
2X, 3X, 4X, etc. of running speed. face.
Heavy Spot - The actual shaft position of an Lag Angle - The distance from 0o to 360o a
imbalance mass. shaft turns between the phase reference
and the high spot. This lag must be ac-
Hertz - Cycles per second. CPM/60.
counted for in placing a trial weight.
HFD - A dynamic high frequency signal
LCD - See Liquid Crystal Display.
(5KHz - 60KHz) from an accelerome-
ter. For assessing the condition of roll- Linear Averaging - See TIME AVERAGING.
ing element ball or roller bearings.
Lines - A term used to describe the resolu-
The HFD measurement has a detected
tion of a dynamic signal analyzer (i.e.,
overall value from 5KHz to 60 KHz but
a 400 line analyzer).
does not record a spectrum.
Liquid Crystal Display - The flat, video dis-
Hierarchy - A method of organizing equip-
play screen used in the Microlog.
ment into logical groups or physical ar-
eas for ease of access in the database. Lissajou Figure - The path of a particle mov-
This format usually has three or four ing in a plane when the components of
levels consisting of plant names, physi- its position along two perpendicular
cal areas, processes, machine names, axes each undergo simple harmonic mo-
and measurement POINTS. tions and the ratio of their frequencies
is a rational number. Also known as a
High Spot - The response of a shaft to an im-
Bowditch curve.
balance force.

GLS - 4 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Glossary

List - A top menu bar function in the PRISM Password - A user defined code word re-
host software. Offers the means to dis- quired to enter the PRISM host soft-
play and access the database by differ- ware. If a password is used, some
ent methods. Also refers to the features of the software will require it
left-hand window of the PRISM host to be reentered at 30 minute intervals
software which displays the database for added database safety. This pass-
either in hierarchy or ROUTE format. word is downloaded to the Microlog
This window is usually referred to as and is required when you wish to “ In-
the List window. itialize” (clear) the Microlog.
Low Pass Filter - A filter whose transmis- Phase - The timing relationship between two
sion band extends from an upper cutoff signals, or between a specific vibration
frequency down to dc. event and a keyphasor pulse.
Natural Frequency - The frequency of free Phase Reference - A signal generated by a
vibration of a system. transducer once per revolution.
Nonsynchronous - See ASYNCHRONOUS. POINT - An ID established in the database.
This ID names an entity which is an ac-
Open - A SET or POINT is considered
tual data collection location. One
OPEN if the members below it in its hi-
POINT is required for each reading
erarchy are visible. Use RIGHT AR-
taken. Both vibration and process
ROW to OPEN a SET or POINT. A
POINTs can be established. A POINT
SET or POINT that is marked on its
may represent a measurement to be
left by an equals symbol is OPEN. Its
taken at a bearing, a shaft, a gear, or at
members are displayed. Also see
a specific location on a machine.
CLOSE.
Pointer Bar - See Cursor Bar.
Orbit Analysis (CMVA40) - Orbit analysis
using proximity probes, presents instan- Pop Up Window - A window that appears on
taneous x and y shaft vibration levels. screen quite often overlapping an exist-
Amplitude peaks, phase, and shaft rota- ing window. Appears when additional
tion can be viewed for immediate evalu- information is to be reported to the user
ation of machine parameters. or more user input is required.
Order Analysis - Locks the frequency dis- Prime Set - A set at the highest level (Level
play to orders of the 1X running speed 1) of a hierarchy.
(that is, integral multiples of the run-
Process Point - POINT type used to monitor
ning speed) and permits immediate or-
values other than vibration. Readings
der-related amplitude comparison.
can be manually entered from the key-
Overall Sample Information - A measure- board or collected directly from certain
ment of the total vibration of a machine. types of instruments. Data values can
be trended by the PRISM host software
for comparison of these process vari-
ables with vibration data.
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory
computer chip.

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 5

User Manual
Glossary

Pull Down Window - A submenu or window mined at slow roll speed after the shaft
that appears on screen below another and rotor are brought up to operating
menu. temperature.
Radial Vibration - Vibration which is per- Runout Compensation - Electrical correc-
pendicular to a shaft’s centerline. tion of a transducer output signal for
the error resulting from runout.
RAM - Random Access Memory chips.
Used in the Microlog to store POINT Sample - Overall value collected at a given
setups and data. time.
Record - A collection of data items. See Sample Number - Identifies a dated sample
FIELD. out of a maximum possible 55 dated
samples.
Reference Run Data - Data taken on a ma-
chine running at balance speed prior to Sampling - The process of obtaining a se-
installing a trial weight. quence of instantaneous values of a
function at regular or intermittent inter-
Report - A top menu bar function in PRISM
vals.
host software and a main menu selec-
tion in the Microlog. An in-depth re- SEE - Abbreviation for Spectral Emitted En-
porting utility that allows various ergy—an SKF patented analysis tech-
reports to be generated from the latest nique which gives superior assessment
stored data. of the operating condition of roller bear-
ings.
Resonance - Vibration at the natural fre-
quency of a system. Set - A SET is a logical division of a data-
base which names an entity that does
RMS - The square root of the average of a
not require a data reading. A SET may
set of squared instantaneous values. Dy-
be an area, building, process, machine
namic signal analyzers perform RMS
name, etc. See POINT.
averaging digitally on successive vibra-
tion spectra. Slow Roll Speed - A slow rotation speed at
which effects from forces such as imbal-
ROUTE - A list of measurement POINTs.
ance are not significant.
ROUTEs of POINTs are usually set up
in sequence for the most efficient collec- Special - A top menu bar function in PRISM
tion of data. host software. Permits modification of
global parameters (including Microlog
Runout - Electrical and mechanical sources
communication), exporting and import-
of error in the output signal of a proxim-
ing of POINTs and their stored data,
ity probe transducer system which do
and screen color adjustments.
not result from dynamic motion,
change of position, shaft centerline posi- Spectra - Plural for spectrum (see FFT).
tion change, or shaft dynamic motion.
Spectrum - See FFT.
Common causes are varying conductiv-
ity of the surface material of the rotat- Spectrum Ensemble - A set of amplitudes in
ing shaft, presence of a localized the frequency domain.
magnetic spot on the surface of the
shaft, out of round shaft, scratches,
rust, dents, and so on. Usually deter-

GLS - 6 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Glossary

Split Weights - A single correction weight Transducer - A device which translates

can be split into two equal weights to be physical vibration energy into electrical
located at convenient phase positions. signals for processing.
Static Imbalance - Occurs when the shaft Tree - Hierarchy listing of a database. Used
center of gravity is displaced from the interchangeably with hierarchy.
rotation axis through bearing centers.
Trial Run #1 Data - Vibration transducer
A statically unbalanced shaft placed on
measurement data taken after installa-
knife edges will roll to rest with the
tion of a trial weight.
weight at the bottom.
Trial Run #2 Data - A second trial weight is
Stiff Shaft - Condition at rotor speeds below
installed on plane 2 when performing
first bending critical speed where the
two-plane balancing. Trial run #2 data
high spot and heavy spot are in phase.
is the data collected at stabilized bal-
Structural Analysis (CMVA40) - Vibration ance speeds after the second trial
mode shapes can be manually estimated weight has been applied to plane 2.
by Frequency Response Function (FRF)
Trim Weight - After the trial weight is re-
displays.
moved and the initial correction weight
Subordinate - A SET within a SET (i.e., a is installed, trim run data is collected.
machine train within a facility). It is used to compute a trim weight that
should be applied to further reduce vi-
Subsynchronous - Frequency components
bration amplitude.
found in the spectrum below machine
running speed. Uniform Window - A dynamic signal ana-
lyzer window function with uniform
Synchronous - Frequency components found
weighting across time.
in the spectrum that are directly related
to running speed. Upload - Transferring collected data from the
Microlog to the PRISM host software.
Synchronous Time Domain - An amplitude
vs. time graph (time domain) of data Value - An individual data measurement re-
taken in relation to a trigger event. lated to a spectrum or to a POINT.
System - English or Metric engineering units. VGA - Video Graphics Adapter.
Time - The time a measurement is recorded. VIB ISO - The RMS average of the vibration
Expressed in hours, minutes, and sec- signal integrated from acceleration to
onds. velocity. The signal is limited to the 10
Hz to 1 kHz bandwidth.
Time Domain - An amplitude vs. time graph.
Waterfall - A three-dimensional multiple
Timestamp - The date and time automat-
spectra display vs. time or rpm.
ically included by Microlog with each
measurement. Zoom - Feature to obtain a considerably
finer resolution over a limited portion
Tracking Analysis - Amplitude and phase of
of the spectrum with a resolution power
the 1X and 2X running speed compo-
coresponding to the number of lines nor-
nents relative to the shaft reference trig-
mally used for the whole spectrum.
ger are simultaneously displayed.

CMVA60 Microlog GLS - 7

User Manual
Glossary

(This page intentionally blank)

GLS - 8 CMVA60 Microlog

User Manual
 Index
alrm
! See exceptions report
- always on
See close sensor mode, 8-15
1X RPM, 2-47 amp, 7-17
computation, 2-48 amplitude, 1-17, 1-24, 7-17
See function keys full scale, 1-17
50% amplitude range, 8-12
See average overlap amplitude resolution, 8-14
75% analysis
See average overlap on-the-spot, 1-24
= See user mode
See open analyzer, 5-1 - 5-8
angle, 4-37
area
main screen, I-10 - I-15
A prompt, I-11, I-13, I-15
alarm indicators working, I-11, I-13
mpa, 1-36, G-13 auto
alarm levels See route mode
internally set, 2-32, 5-3 auto answer
alarm markers, 1-18 See modem mode
alarm setpoints, 1-7 auto range, 1-23
alarm threshold, 7-5, 7-7 See system setup
alarm type average
See dynamic points report See average type
alarm1 See balance setup
See dynamic points report average mode, 2-17
See exceptions report continuous, 5-3
See missed points report finite, 5-3
alarm2 See measurement type:freq
See dynamic points report repeat, 5-3
See exceptions report See spectrum setup
alarms average overlap
See static measurements maximum, 2-18, 4-84
See measurement type:freq

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 1

User Manual change 01
 See spectrum setup BT, I-12
average type bump test, 4-91 - 4-93
See measurement type:freq
See spectrum setup
averages C
number of, 1-17
See spectrum setup calculation, 4-35
averages, number of change data, 4-47 - 4-52
See measurement type:freq clear, 8-26
See measurement type:orders clear balancing job, 4-16
avg, 1-14 clear data, 4-61
See dynamic points report clock set, 8-5 - 8-6
See utilities menu
close, 1-4
B close, global
See options menu
balance job reports, 4-59 - 4-60 coded notes
balancing, I-5 See options menu
advanced, 4-20 collecting data, 1-2 - 1-3
basic, 4-2 HFD, 2-45 - 2-46
balancing (advanced) menu, 4-20 nonroute process, 2-43 - 2-44
balancing setup collecting dynamic data, 5-3
reset, 4-61 com port, E-4
band ov, 1-27 combining weights, 4-54 - 4-56
band overall level, 7-16 communication parameters, 3-1
band peak level, 7-15 communications, 8-7 - 8-9
band pk, 1-26 utilities menu, 8-7 - 8-9
bar graph, 1-14 communications preferences, E-3
batteries, A-1 compressed
battery, 8-3 See data storage
charging, A-2 - A-4 condition displays, I-13
memory, A-6 configuration wizard, 4-117 - 4-122
battery pack, I-12 connecting your Microlog system,
baud I-10, F-2
See communication connection
See communications attended host, 3-1
BNC connector hard-wired, 3-1
power, I-21 continuous
BNC connectors, I-21 See average mode
bode plot, 4-102 correction weight, 4-38
bps CPM
See communications See speed

Index - 2 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
current analysis, I-5, 4-77 delete data
setup, 4-78 See options menu
current zoom, 4-79, 4-86 delete MPA set data
cursor, 5-4 See options menu
See function keys Desc, 2-7
cursor lock, 2-31 See input setup
cursor type See process input
See display setup description
cut-off See dynamic points report
See input setup See end of shift report
cutoff, low freq See input setup
See input setup MPA point, 1-32
cutoff, low frequency detection
See input setup See data enhanced measurements
cyclic analysis, I-5, 4-69 See dynamic points report
setup, 4-72 type of, 2-5
take data, 4-70 detection method
See input setup
detection type
D input setup, 2-5
dialog box
D (data recorded) communication, E-4
See route list password setup, E-5
data system preferences, E-3
collecting, 1-2 - 1-3 directory path, E-3
data bits, E-5 disconnect, E-9
data collection, 1-22 - 1-23 display contrast
MPA points, 1-33, G-11 See utilities menu
triaxial MPA group, G-11 DISPLAY ILLUMINATION, I-17
data enhanced measurements display setup, 2-5, 2-22 - 2-23, 2-25
HFD, 2-46 display type
data table, 4-102 display setup, 2-5
data transfer, 3-4 disply expand, I-19
See transfer See function keys
database setup report, 7-20 download, 1-2 - 1-3, 3-3 - 3-6
date downloading
See dynamic points report FAM information, 1-28 - 1-31
See exceptions report dynamic
See set clock See types of measurements
deg., 7-17 dynamic measurements, 1-11 - 1-20,
degrees, 7-17 2-4 - 2-5

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 3

User Manual change 01
dynamic points report, 7-6, 7-12, flat top
7-18 See window
flow chart
standard velocity measurement,
E App-4
freeze, I-19
elapsed time indicator, 8-4 See function keys
end, I-18 freq
end of shift report, 7-9 maximum, 2-15
engineering units start, 2-15
English, 4-34 freq range
Metric, 4-34 See dynamic points report
ENTER, I-17 See spectrum setup
Env filter , App-20 freq., 7-17
envelope filter, 2-8 freq. scale, E-3
enveloped current, 4-79, 4-90 frequency, 1-24, 7-17
estimate trial weight setup, 4-33, See spectrum setup
4-44 frequency range, 1-17
exceptions report, 7-7 from the designated set
See upload
from(CPM), 1-26, 6-5, 7-15
F full scale
See data enhanced measurements
F1, 2-39 See dynamic points report
See function keys See input setup
F1, route list, 7-5 See process input
F1-Connect, E-15 function keys, 2-33 - 2-39, 5-4 - 5-6
F2, 2-34, 2-39, 7-6, 8-25 fundamental marker
See function keys See marker setup
FAM
downloading, 1-28 - 1-31
FAM data, 7-19
fast G
See route collection
FFT alarm threshold, 7-5 global close, I-18
FFT Hz/CPM See options menu
See system setup global open, I-18
FFT spectrum, 1-19 See options menu
FFT spectrum display, 8-19 go to bottom
finite See options menu
See average mode go to top
See options menu

Index - 4 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 influence coeff, 4-52
H initialize, 8-24 - 8-25
hammer test, 4-91 See utilities menu
Hanning input
See window See input setup
hardware requirements input connector, I-22, 8-15
triaxial, G-10 input offset
harmonic See process input
See marker mode:cursor lock input sens
See marker mode:fixed freq See data enhanced measurements
See marker type See dynamic points report
harmonic marker See process input
See marker setup input setup, 2-5 - 2-11, 2-41, 2-45,
harmonic markers 2-47
See mkrs on/off input signal, 8-11
HFD input trigger level
See types of measurements See trigger setup
HFD data instantaneous
collecting, 2-45 - 2-46 See time domain
HFD input, 2-45 instructions, 1-3
hide
See route spectrum
hierarchy, 1-1, 1-4, 8-22 J
home, I-18
Hz job
See speed clearing, 4-61
deleting, 4-61

I
ID, 2-6 - 2-7
K
See balance setup keypad, I-16 - I-19
See dynamic points report keys
See exceptions report arrow, 1-5, I-18, 8-2
See missed points report control, I-17
See process input control keys, I-16
See static measurements DEL, I-20
identification of spectral peaks end, I-18
table, 7-17 Escape, I-17
in band function, I-19
overall, 2-11 function keys, I-16
influ coeff, 4-52 global close, I-18

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 5

User Manual change 01
 global open, I-18 magnitude, 4-49
home, I-18 See infl coeff
menu, I-17 main screen areas, I-10 - I-15
miscellaneous, I-19 make reading
numeric, I-18 See options menu
numeric keys, I-16 manual read
operating keys, I-16 See options menu
page down, I-18 marker mode
page up, I-18 cursor lock, 2-34, 5-5
reducing keystrokes, 1-22 fixed freq, 2-36
shift, I-19 See marker setup
space, I-20 marker setup, 2-6, 2-29 - 2-31
marker type, 2-35
See marker setup
L marker, fundamental
See marker setup
last marker, harmonic
See missed points report See marker setup
See static measurements marker, relative
length/rev See marker setup
See speed input marker, sideband
length/revolution See marker setup
See trigger setup markers
lin/log alarm, 1-18
See function keys markers on/off, I-19
line frequency, 4-79 maximum
linear, 2-40 See average overlap
lines maximum freq
See dynamic points report See measurement type:freq
See spectrum setup measurement
log, 2-40 global, 8-1
login, E-12 - E-15 measurement options
low fq lmt previous point, 2-2
See dynamic points report skip machine, 2-2
low freq cutoff skip point, 2-2
See input setup measurement options menu
(dynamic), 1-21
measurement options menu (static),
M 1-8 - 1-10
measurement type
M (messages) See input setup
See route list

Index - 6 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 See spectrum setup motor nameplate data, 4-85
measurement type:freq, 2-14 - 2-19 off, 4-85
See spectrum setup specify, 4-85
measurement type:orders, 2-20 - mounting
2-21 triax sensor, G-2
See spectrum setup mounting triax sensor, G-2
measurement type:track, 2-22 - 2-23 magnetic, G-8
measurement, type of permanent, G-3
See input setup stud, G-4
measurements, dynamic mpa
See dynamic measurements alarm indicators, 1-36, G-13
measurements, static multi-point automation, 1-32
See static measurements mpa points, 1-32
memory test MPA route, 1-32
See utilities menu multi-point automation
menu MPA, 1-32
options, 2-44, 2-47
remote active, E-16
utility functions, 4-53 N
MICROLOG, I-4
baud rate, E-11 N (no data recorded)
change dbase, E-20 - E-21 See route list
clear memory, E-22 no., 7-17
connection parameters, E-14 noise, 2-17, 4-82
disconnect, E-25 none
login, E-12 - E-15 See average overlap
modem mode originate, E-11 See modem mode
preference settings, E-10 - E-11 nonroute, 1-4, 2-1 - 2-50
remote, E-11 nonsync, 7-17
reset dbase, E-23 - E-24 nonsynchronous, 7-17
send data, E-16 - E-17 normal
transfer, E-18 See data storage
missed points report, 7-11 See route collection
mkrs on/off See route mode
See function keys See sensor mode
modem communications See user mode
troubleshooting, E-26 - E-28 notes report, 7-21
modem mode, 3-2 number of averages
auto answer, 3-6 See measurement type:freq
originate, 3-6 See measurement type:orders
modem status, E-9 number of orders
See measurement type:orders

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 7

User Manual change 01
O P
off page down, I-18
See average type See options menu
ok, 6-7 page up, I-18
open, 1-4 See options menu
open, global parameters
See options menu communication, 3-1, 3-4
open/close indicator, 1-4 global, 8-10, 8-18
operating keys, I-17 parity, E-5
operator id tagging, 8-22 password, 8-24 - 8-25
options add, E-7
MPA, 1-36, G-14 See communications
options menu, 1-9, 1-21, 2-44, 2-47 delete, E-8
orbit, 2-13 edit, E-7
order, 1-24, 7-17 See initialize
orders setup, E-5
See spectrum setup peak alert, 6-7, 7-16
originate peak alert level, 6-6, 7-15
See modem mode peak danger, 6-7, 7-16
output connector, I-22, 8-16 peak danger level, 6-5, 7-15
OV, I-12 peak level, 6-6
ov dan, 1-26 peak level line, 1-26
ov wrn, 1-26 peak values, 1-25
OvA, 1-27 phase, 4-49
OvD, 1-27 See influ coeff
overall, 1-18, 2-11, 7-17 phase connector, I-22, 8-16
overall alert, 6-7, 7-16 phase measurements, 5-7 - 5-8
overall alert level, 6-6, 7-15 phase reference adapter, 5-7
overall danger, 6-7, 7-16 phase spectrum, 7-18
overall danger level, 6-6, 7-15 phase type
overall level, 6-6 See display setup
overall level line, 1-26 pickup, 1-21
overall values, 1-25 pk dan, 1-26
overlap pk hold
See average overlap See average type
overload pk wrn, 1-26
clearing, 1-23 PkA, 1-27
PkD, 1-27
planes, 4-27
planes 2, separately, 4-27

Index - 8 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
planes:1, 4-27, 4-48 rated full load amps, 4-86
planes:2, 4-35, 4-49 rated full load RPM, 4-86
point rated no load amps, 4-86
subordinate, 1-4 reenter
POINT ID, 2-5 See options menu
route display, 8-22 reference frequency
polar plot, 4-103 See marker setup
previous MPA set/point reference run, 4-31
See options menu relative
previous point See marker mode:cursor lock
See measurement options See marker mode:fixed freq
See options menu See marker type
print, 4-104 relative markers
print test, 7-22 See mkrs on/off
printer adapter, 7-1 remote communications, E-1
printer type, 7-4 remote login
PRISM2, I-6 password, E-14
probe, 1-21, 1-24 username, E-13
process repeat
See types of measurements See average mode
process data report
collecting, 2-43 - 2-44 balance job, 4-59 - 4-60
process input, 2-41 database setup, 7-20
process measurements, 2-40 - 2-42 dynamic points, 7-12
PROM end of shift, 7-9
See initialize exceptions, 7-7
prompt area, I-11 missed points, 7-11
pulses per revolution notes, 7-21
See trigger setup print test, 7-22
pulses/revolution report header, 7-4
See trigger setup reports, 7-1 - 7-22
balance job, 4-59 - 4-60
dynamic points, 7-18
R reset, 8-26
reset measmt, 1-19
radius See function keys
See rotor review, 6-1 - 6-8
range review/enter
See input setup See change data
See spectrum setup rms, 7-17
range, full scale rotor
See input setup

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 9

User Manual change 01
 radius, 4-35
two-plane, 4-35
S
weight, 4-34 save, I-19, 2-7
rotor bar condition assessment See function keys
report, 4-89 save new data, 4-104
route, 1-1 - 1-40 screen 1
instructions, 1-3 See display setup
starting a, 1-2 screen 2
route collection, 8-20 See display setup
See route setup sensitivity
route list, 1-4 - 1-6, 7-1, 7-5 - 7-6 See input setup
options, 1-5 sensor, type of
route mode, 8-19 input setup, 2-8
See route setup serial number, I-11
route mode:auto, 1-20 setpoints
route mode:normal, 1-19 alarm, 1-7
route setup, 8-18 - 8-22 settings
See utilities menu for fast data collection, 1-22
route spectrum, 8-20 settings menu, E-2
See route setup settling mode, 8-16
route spectrum:hide, 1-20, 1-23 conservative, 8-16
route spectrum:show, 1-13, 1-20, off, 8-16
1-23 setup, 2-1 - 2-2, 5-1 - 5-2
RPM display, 2-5
See dynamic points report estimate trial weight, 4-44
See input setup input, 2-5 - 2-11
run up/coast down, 4-94 - 4-116 marker, 2-6, 2-29 - 2-31
setup, 4-105 spectrum, 2-5, 2-12 - 2-13
take data, 4-97 trial weight, 4-47 - 4-52
run up/coast down setup, 4-105 trigger, 2-6, 2-26 - 2-28
running speed, 1-24 show
data collection, 2-49 - 2-50 See route spectrum
See types of measurements sideband
running speed measurements, 2-47 - See marker mode:cursor lock
2-48 See marker mode:fixed freq
runout, 4-27 See marker type
runout magnitude, 4-30 sideband frequency
See balance setup See marker setup
runout phase sideband marker
See balance setup See marker setup
sideband markers

Index - 10 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 See mkrs on/off displacement measurement, App-25
signals - App-26
low amplitude, 2-17, 4-82 enveloped acceleration
skip machine measurement, App-20 - App-22
See measurement options utilities menu, App-11
See options menu velocity measurement, App-13
skip MPA set start freq
See options menu See measurement type:freq
skip point See spectrum setup
See measurement options status, 1-27, 6-7, 7-16
See options menu See end of shift report
slow roll, 4-30 status line, I-11 - I-13
specifications stop bits, E-5
CMVA55, B-1 - B-4 subsync, 7-17
spectral band, 7-17 subsynchronous, 7-17
spectral band setup, 1-26 support module, I-3
spectral banding, 1-25 CMVA6112, I-8
spectral banding summary, 1-28 supported modems, E-25
spectral energy summary, 7-17 sync, 7-17
spectrum setup, 2-5, 2-12 - 2-13 synchronous, 7-17
measurement type:freq, 2-14 - 2-19 synchronous RPM, 4-85
measurement type:orders, 2-20 - synchronous time
2-21 See average type
measurement type:track, 2-22 - 2-23 system
speed, 4-48 See system setup
CPM, 4-34 system setup, 8-10 - 8-17
Hz, 4-34 See utilities menu
ratio, 1-15
reference point, 1-15
tagging, 1-14 T
speed setup, 2-47
splitting weights, 4-40 tach input, 2-49
standard microlog measurement take data, 2-5, 2-43, 2-47
acceleration, App-5 temp/battery, 8-3 - 8-4
enveloped acceleration, App-5 See utilities menu
velocity, App-4 temperature
standard microlog measurment internal, 8-3
displacement, App-5 the entire SD microlog
standard microlog settings See upload
acceleration measurement, App-16 this
- App-18 See static measurements
threshold, 7-7, 7-12, 7-17

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 11

User Manual change 01
 See report controls
time
U
See set clock ULS, I-1
time domain, 2-32 uniform
to(CPM), 1-26, 6-5, 7-15 See window
trace units
display setup, 2-5, 2-24 See exceptions report
tracking See input setup
See spectrum setup units for weights
tracking filter, I-5, 4-65 See balance setup
setup, 4-67 upload, 3-7 - 3-8
take data, 4-66 upload routes, E-17
transducer sensitivity user mode, 2-1
See input setup analysis, 2-1, 5-1
transfer, 3-1 - 3-8 normal, 2-1, 5-1
trial run, 4-32 user note
trial weight setup, 4-47 - 4-52 See options menu
triax sensor stud installation, G-6 utilities, 8-1 - 8-26
triaxial MPA setup, G-8 utilities menu, 8-10 - 8-22
triaxial sensor, G-1 utility functions, 4-53
triaxial sensor interface, G-1
trigger, 5-7
trigger delay
See trigger setup
V
trigger level value
See trigger setup See exceptions report
trigger mode variation, amplitude
See trigger setup See average type
trigger setup, 2-6, 2-26 - 2-28 version number, I-11
trigger slope vibration spectra, I-13
See trigger setup view mpa spectrum, 8-23
trigger source view setup
See trigger setup See options menu
trim run, 4-43 - 4-46
troubleshooting
communications, E-26 - E-28 W
two-plane balancing, 4-39, 4-46
type waiting mode, E-9
See dynamic points report warning
See input setup low battery, I-12
types of measurements, 2-3 signal overload, I-12
weight, 4-37

Index - 12 CMVA60 Microlog

change 01 User Manual
 rotor, 4-34
weights
X
combining, 4-54 - 4-56 x axis label
splitting, 4-40 See display setup
weights left in, 4-38
window, 2-19, 4-84, 7-14
See dynamic points report Z
See measurement type:freq
zoom, I-19, C-1 - C-2
See measurement type:orders
automatic, 2-15
window type
zoom in
See spectrum setup
See function keys
working area, I-11
zoom out
See function keys

CMVA60 Microlog Index - 13

User Manual change 01